HTR-6050
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
Important safety instructions
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Important safety instructions
Caution-ii En
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution-iii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit
in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from
the wall outlet.
19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This
state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit
is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
English
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Features ................................................................... 2
Getting started ........................................................ 3
Quick start guide .................................................... 4
Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4
Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components............................................ 6
Step 3: Turn on the power
and press SCENE 1 button .................................... 8
What do you want to do with this unit? ..................... 9
Connections ........................................................... 10
Rear panel ................................................................ 10
Placing speakers....................................................... 11
Connecting speakers ................................................ 12
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14
Information on HDMI™.......................................... 15
Connecting video components................................. 16
Connecting audio components................................. 19
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
........ 20
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20
Connecting the power cable..................................... 21
Turning on and off the power .................................. 21
Front panel display .................................................. 22
Optimizing the speaker setting
for your listening room .................................... 24
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 24
Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 28
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 28
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 31
Playback ................................................................ 32
Basic operations....................................................... 32
Additional operations............................................... 33
Sound field programs ........................................... 37
Sound field program descriptions ............................ 37
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 40
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 40
Manual tuning .......................................................... 40
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 41
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 41
Selecting preset stations........................................... 42
Exchanging preset station ........................................ 42
Using a USB memory device or
a USB portable audio player ........................... 43
Playback operation................................................... 43
Recording .............................................................. 45
SET MENU ............................................................46
Using SET MENU ................................................... 47
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 48
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 52
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 54
Remote control features........................................56
Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 56
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
........ 57
Setting remote control codes ................................... 59
Advanced setup......................................................60
Troubleshooting.....................................................61
Glossary..................................................................68
Specifications .........................................................70
Index .......................................................................71
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control.
In case the button names differ between the front panel and
the remote control, the button name on the remote control is
given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
•“
9
SPEAKERS” or “
A
MULTI CH IN” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the appendix
pages at the end of this manual for the information about
each position of the parts.
•The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
Features
2 En
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
[Front, Center, Surround channels]
100 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
SCENE select function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE template customizing capability
Decoders and DSP circuits
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-
channel surround sound
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Dolby Digital decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder
◆ DTS decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission)
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
◆ MP3, WMA and WAV capability
Other features
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ Direct Stereo mode for pure hi-fi sound for analog and PCM
2-channel sources
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
This unit is equipped with the technologies developed by Analog
Devices, Inc. and others. It is strictly prohibited to use this unit
for use other than audiovisual purposes.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
Features
Getting started
3 En
English
INTRODUCTION
■ Checking the supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the
models.
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code.
Getting started
Note
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT
DIRECT ST.
EON
V-AUX USB
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Optimizer
microphone
Notes
1
3
2
Quick start guide
4 En
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy
DVD movie playback in your home theater.
In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ Indoor FM antenna
❏ AM loop antenna
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2
❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1
❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5
❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player ................................................. 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ................................................ 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
DVD player
Video monitor
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
☞
P. 6
☞
P. 8
☞
P. 5
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
5 En
English
INTRODUCTION
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with
a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped
(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of
your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”
(black) terminals.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front speakers
Center and surround speakers
4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input
jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack of this unit.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
LR LR
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
L
R
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
SUB
WO
O
FER
IN
OU
T
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OU
T
(
REC)
IN
(PLAY)
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
AC OUTLETS
12 3 4
To the front
right speaker
Front left speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
To the
surround
right speaker
To the surround
left speaker
To the center
speaker
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
MD/
CD-R
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
Subwoofer cable
Input jack
AV receiver
Subwoofer
Quick start guide
6 En
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and the
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the video input
jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
LR LR
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
L
R
DVD
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
SUB
WO
O
FER
IN
OU
T
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
OU
T
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
AC OUTLETS
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
Digital coaxial
audio output jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV receiver
L/MONO
AUDIO AUDIO
COLOR STREAM HD
VIDEO
VIDEO-1 IN IN
S-VIDEO
RYP
B
P
R
RL/MONO
Video monitor
AV receiver
Video input jack
VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jack
Video cable
Quick start guide
7 En
English
INTRODUCTION
4 Connect the FM and AM antennas to this
unit.
See page 20 for the details.
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and
you can connect either end of the wire to AM and GND terminal.
The shape of the AM and GND terminals may vary depending on
the unit.
5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power supply of
the other components. See page 21 for details.
Note
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop antenna
Open the lever Insert Close the lever
■ For further connections
• Using the other kind of speaker
combinations
☞ P. 12
• Connecting a video monitor
☞ P. 16
• Connecting a DVD player
☞ P. 16
• Connecting a DVD recorder
☞ P. 16
• Connecting a cable TV or a satellite tuner
☞ P. 16
• Connecting a CD player and an MD
recorder
☞ P. 19
• Connecting a DVD player via analog
multi-channel audio connection
☞ P. 19
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
☞ P. 20
• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna
☞ P. 20
• Using the USB jack on the front panel
☞ P. 43
Quick start guide
8 En
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
3 Press
F
SCENE 1.
“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,
and this unit automatically optimize own status for
the DVD playback.
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
5 Rotate
8
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
When you change the input source or sound field program, the
SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected
SCENE button turns off.
■ Using the other SCENE buttons
In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding
SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources.
Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the
connected DVD player as the back ground
music for this room...”
Press
F
SCENE 2 (or
E
SCENE 2) to select
“Disc Listening”.
Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”
Press
F
SCENE 3 (or
E
SCENE 3) to select
“TV Viewing”.
To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a
cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See
page 16 for details.
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13).
Note
Note
Note
Quick start guide
9 En
English
INTRODUCTION
Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from
the FM radio station...”
Press
F
SCENE 4 (or
E
SCENE 4) to select
“Radio Listening”.
• To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into
the desired radio station in advance. See pages 40 to 42 for
tuning information.
• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the
connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the
end of the indoor FM antenna.
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See
page 28 for details.
■ After using this unit...
Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit
from the standby mode, press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
M
POWER). See page 21 for details.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power
in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Notes
Note
What do you want to do with this
unit?
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
• Using various SCENE templates
☞ P. 28
• Creating your original SCENE templates
☞ P. 31
■ Using various input sources
• Basic controls of this unit
☞ P. 32
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
☞ P. 40
• Using your USB portable device with this
unit
☞ P. 43
■ Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞ P. 37
• Using the pure direct mode for the high
fidelity sound
☞ P. 34
• Customizing the sound field programs
☞ P. 39
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
parameters for your listening room
(AUTO SETUP)
☞ P. 24
• Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit
☞ P. 46
• Setting the remote control
☞ P. 56
• Adjusting the advanced parameters
☞ P. 60
■ Additional features
Automatically turning off this unit
☞ P. 36
Connections
10 En
1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
2 HDMI jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
3 VIDEO jacks
See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.
4 ANTENNA terminals
See page 20 for connection information.
5 SPEAKERS terminals
See page 12 for connection information.
6 AC OUTLETS
See page 21 for connection information.
7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 16 and 19 for connection information.
8 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
9 AUDIO jacks
See pages 16 and 19 for connection information.
0 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 12 for connection information.
Connections
Rear panel
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
L
R
L
R
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
L
R
DVD
DT
V
/CBL
D
V
R
C
D
S
UB
W
OO
F
ER
IN
O
UT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
M
D/
CD-R
O
UT
(
R
E
C
)
IN
(PLAY)
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
AC OUTLETS
7 8 9 0
1
2 3 4 5 6
11 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-
channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
FL
C
SL
SR
SW
1.8 m (6 ft)
12 En
Connections
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
A speaker cable is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 21).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or the speakers.
• Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13).
Note
Subwoofer
Center speaker
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
L
R
L
R
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
L
R
DT
V
/CBL
D
VR
C
D
SUB
W
OOF
ER
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
AM
FRONT A
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
M
D/
CD
-
R
O
UT
(
R
E
C
)
IN
(PLAY)
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
AC OUTLETS
Subwoofer
Front speakers (A)
LeftRight
Center
speaker
Front speakers (B)
LeftRight
Surround speakers
LeftRight
13 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS
terminal
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the bare wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Loosen the knob.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 21 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
A
PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to
select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω
MIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
10 mm (3/8”)
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω
MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
Note
SP IMP.- 8 MIN
SP IMP.- 6 MIN
14 En
Connections
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with
digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
optical digital audio cable. Do not discard the cap. When you
are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)
and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on
separate wires of component video cables.
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
S-video
cable plug
Notes
Note
PR
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
15 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
You can play back pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source component to this unit using HDMI
connections.
At that time, audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the
connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (
DVD or DTV/CBL).
Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the
instruction manual of each connected component.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters
(16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video
monitor.
To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit,
– make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 16).
– mute the volume of the connected video monitor.
HDMI cable plug
HDMI
16 En
Connections
Connect the video components as follows.
y
You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV,
and cable TV to this unit using the S VIDEO or COMPONENT
VIDEO connections (see page 17).
■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD
player
■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner
and a DVD recorder
Connecting video components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
1
2
3
R
L
R
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
C
L
R
VV
DVD player
Video monitor
Video in
Video out
Audio out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
1
3
R
L
R
DTV/CBL
D
V
R
CD
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
2
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
L
R
L
R
L
R
VVV
O
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Audio out
Video out
Audio out
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
17 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
■ Connecting to the HDMI, COMPONENT VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks
You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using
HDMI, COMPONENT VIDEO or S VIDEO connections.
Be sure to connect your video components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect
your video monitor to this unit using a HDMI connection, connect your video components to this unit using the HDMI connection.
HDMI connection
• When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI
connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the
TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video
connection.
• Connect the input source components to the HDMI DVD or
HDMI DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video
monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
• Audio/video signals output from the connected component
(such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video
monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input
source (DVD or DTV/CBL).
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
Note
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output
from any speaker terminals but output from the
connected video monitor.
To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this
unit,
– make an analog or digital connection besides the
HDMI connection (see page 16).
– mute the volume of the connected video monitor.
Notes
C
H INPUT
E
NT VIDEO VIDEO
ANTENNA
AUDIO
L
R
DT
V
/CBL
D
VR
C
D
IN
O
UT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DVR DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
IN OUT
DTV/CBLMONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
M
D
/
CD-R
(
IN
(PLAY)
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
Video monitor
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD player
18 En
Connections
COMPONENT VIDEO connection S VIDEO connection
MULTI CH INPUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
L
R
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR
OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
DVD player
Video monitor
Video out
Video out
Video out
Video in
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
D
TV
/CB
L
D
VR
C
D
I
N
O
UT
DVD
DVD
S VIDEO
VIDEO
DVR
IN OUT
DTV/CBL MONITOR
OUT
HDMI
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
S S
S
S S
DVD player
Video monitor
Video out
Video out
Video out
Video in
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Video in
19 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Connect the audio components as follows.
■ Connecting a CD player and a CD
recorder/MD recorder
When you connect your CD player via analog and digital
connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL
INPUT jack.
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for
discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks
on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 33), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system
before using this feature.
Connecting audio components
Note
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
R
SURROU
N
AUDIO OUTPU
T
L
1
3
R
L
R
DTV/CBL
DVR
CD
SUB
WOOFER
IN
OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUNDFRONT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
B
Y
DVD
VIDEO
FM
UNBAL.
75
MD/
CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(P
L
AY )
2
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
CD player CD recorder or
MD recorder
Audio outAudio out Audio inAudio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
MULTI CH INPUT
L
1
R
SUBWOOFER
COAXIAL
DTV/
CBL
DVD
2
CENTERSURROUNDFRONT
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Surround out
Center out
Subwoofer out
Front out
Notes
20 En
Connections
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yama ha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECT STEREOSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
V
L
R
Game console or
video camera
Video
output
Audio
output
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Notes
ANTENNA
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
R
MD/
C
D
-R
O
(
R
IN
(P
LAY
)
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Ground
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of
vinyl-covered wire extended
outdoors from a window.
21 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable
into the AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
Use these outlets to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlets. Power to these outlets is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlets is cut off when this unit is set to the standby
mode. For information on the maximum power or the total
power consumption of the components that can be
connected to these outlets, see “Specifications” on
page 70.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
M
POWER) to turn
on this unit.
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
■ Set this unit to the standby mode
Press
1
STANDBY/ON (or
N
STANDBY) to set
this unit to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
Power cable
Turning on and off the power
22 En
Connections
1 Decoder indicator
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit functions.
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 37).
3 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 38).
4 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 38).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 24).
7 Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode
(see pages 40).
8 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 36).
9 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
0 PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
A Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 36).
B SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected
(see page 33).
C NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see
page 35).
D CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 37).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 37).
E Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
F SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 36).
G Input channel and speaker indicators
LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE
signal.
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Front panel display
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
q PL
q PL
ENHANCER
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
AUTO
YPAO
PRESET
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
A0 C FE
G
D
54
6 7 91 2 3 8
B
Input channel indicators
LFE
LCR
SL SR
LFE indicator
23 En
Connections
English
PREPARATION
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Y
Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 59.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
30º 30º
OPTIMIZER MIC
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
24 En
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears
in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the
OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure of the following check points
before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front
speaker system (see page 33).
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The following display appears in the OSD.
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the microphone heading
upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the
attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone
to the tripod (etc.).
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
Using AUTO SETUP
Notes
Y
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
Optimizer
microphone
AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
. START
Automatic
processing
of all item
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Start
p
p
Optimizer microphone
25 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
English
PREPARATION
4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO”
and the pointer is pointing at “START”.
y
You can also select the following setup methods. In this
case, press
G
k to select “SETUP”, press
G
l / h to
select the one of the following choises and then select
“START”.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the previous
settings.
• Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP”
settings and restore the previous settings.
• Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP”
parameters to the initial factory settings.
“RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have
previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
5 Press
D
AMP and then press
G
ENTER to
start the setup procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
“AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD.
• During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in
the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes
for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure.
This unit performs the following checks:
Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the
volume level of each speaker.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
The display changes as follows.
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
• If “E-6:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 4.
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output.
• If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the
setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For
details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 27.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO
SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning
messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 27).
Note
Notes
Notes
AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
. START
Automatic
processing
of all item
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Start
p
p
AUTO:RESULT
NO WARNING
RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
. SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
INITIALIZING
. WIRING/LEVEL
DISTANCE
SIZE
WAITING;;;
;;;;;;;;;;
[]:Exit
[
AUTO:CHECK
26 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
6 Press
G
ENTER to display the setup results
in detail.
7 Press
G
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the setup result displays.
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 46).
The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be
longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your speakers.
8 Press
G
ENTER to return to the
“AUTO:RESULT” display.
9 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET”
and “CANCEL” and then press
G
l / h to
select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
10 Press
G
ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
11 Press
Q
MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
12 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from
this unit.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top
of this unit.
y
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to
recalibrate your system.
Note
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
Results of the speaker
distance from the
listening position
Results of the speaker
size
Results of the speaker
output level
AUTO:RESULT
NO WARNING
RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
. SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
SET MENU
TOP MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
27 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
English
PREPARATION
■ If an error screen appears
Press
G
k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or
“EXIT” and then press
G
ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-5:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
■ If “WARNING” appears
When this unit detects potential problems during the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
“RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to
correct your speaker settings.
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
1 Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press
G
ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
2 Press
G
l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
y
• For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 65.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–
–” is displayed instead.
3 Press
G
ENTER to return to the top
“RESULT:EXIT” display.
AUTO:ERROR
. E-5:USER CANCEL
Don't operate
any function
RETRY EXIT
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
>
Note
AUTO:RESULT
. WARNING(1)
RESULT
SP : 3/2/0.1
DIST: 3.2/3.5m
LVL : -2/+2dB
SET CANCEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
>
WARNING:W-1
<OUT OF PHASE>
Reverse Channel
-- FR
CENTER
-- --
[p]/[[]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
28 En
This unit is equipped with 15 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
each SCENE button:
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing
SCENE 2: Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the desired
F
SCENE (or
E
SCENE) button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of the
currently assigned SCENE template appears in the
front panel display.
2 Press
D
INPUT l / h (or press
D
AMP and
then press
G
l / h) to select the desired
template.
3 Press the
F
SCENE (or
E
SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
button.
• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from
the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically
canceled.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 56 for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Selecting the desired SCENE
template
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the
SCENE
template to the
SCENE button
1
1
1
or
Remote control
Flashes
3 seconds
3 seconds
Front panel
DVD Viewing
Notes
l INPUT h
AMP
ENTER
or
Front panel
Remote control
DVD MovieView
1
1
or
Remote controlFront panel
29 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 31 for details.
2
1
3
4
Radio Listening
CD HiFi Listening
CD Listening
CD Music Listening
USB Audio Listening
DVD Live Viewing
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Viewing
Disc HiFi Listening
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
DVR Viewing
TV Viewing
TV Sports Viewing
Game Playing
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
TUNER (FM/AM)
USB
CD
DVD
DVR
Video sources
(DVD video,
Recorded video)
TV programs
Video games
USB memory device
or USB portable
audio player
Radio programs
Music discs (CD,
SACD or DVD-Audio)
SCENE template
Which source do you like to
play back?
Which component do you
like for playback?
Default SCENE
buttons
30 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions
\
SCENE template
Features
Input source Playback mode
DVD Viewing
(SCENE 1 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents
on your DVD player.
DVD STRAIGHT
DVD Movie Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
DVD player.
DVD Movie Dramatic
DVD Live Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on
your DVD player.
DVD Pop/Rock
DVR Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
digital video recorder.
DVR Movie Dramatic
Disc HiFi Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your DVD player.
DVD DIRECT STEREO
Music Disc Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your DVD player.
DVD 2ch Stereo
Disc Listening
(SCENE 2 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on
your DVD player as the background music.
DVD 5ch Stereo
CD HiFi Listening
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity
sound of the music discs on your CD player.
CD
DIRECT STEREO
CD Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your CD player.
CD 2ch Stereo
CD Music Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back the music source
on your CD player as the background music.
CD 5ch Stereo
Radio Listening
(SCENE 4 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
TUNER
MUSIC ENHANCER
5ch STEREO
USB Audio Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your
USB memory device or a USB portable audio player.
USB
MUSIC ENHANCER
5ch STEREO
TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs.
DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
TV Sports Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on
TV.
DTV/CBL TV Sports
Game Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play video games.
V-AUX Game
31 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 15 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
■ Customizing the preset SCENE
templates
Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press and hold the desired
E
SCENE button
for 3 seconds and then press
D
AMP.
The SCENE template customizing screen appears on
the video monitor.
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
assigned to any of the
E
SCENE button, press
G
l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the
menu screen.
3 Press
G
k / n to select the desired parameter
of the SCENE template and then
G
l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• INPUT: The input source component
• MODE: The active sound field programs,
STRAIGHT or DIRECT STEREO
mode (see pages 34 and 38)
• NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see
page 35)
− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
4 Press the
E
SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE
template.
• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding
E
SCENE buttons, you may need to set the
input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See
page 56 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each
E
SCENE button, and if you create another customized
SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized
SCENE template with the new one.
• The newly created template is only available for the assigned
E
SCENE button.
■ Renaming the SCENE templates
Select “SCENE” in step 3 of “Customizing the
preset SCENE templates” and then press
G
ENTER.
• Press
G
k / n to select the desired character.
•Press
G
l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the
space or the desired character.
• Press
H
RETURN to cancel the new name.
• Press
G
ENTER to confirm the new name.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Note
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select a SCENE template
Assign to the SCENE
button
Create the original SCENE
template
AMP
1
3 seconds
Notes
1
PLAYBACK
32 En
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
C
)) to
select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
3 Start playback on the selected component or
select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 40 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
4
Rotate
8
VOLUME
(or press
R
VOLUME +/–
)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
5 Press
A
PROGRAM l / h (or press
D
AMP
and then
J
PROG l / h) repeatedly to
select the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display.
See page 37 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 33).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than
48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 38).
• To display information about the currently selected input
source in the OSD, see page 35 for details.
■ A quick guide to contents
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
Basic operations
INPUT:DVD
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
Currently selected input source
Available input source
Notes
When you want to...
See
page
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 34
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 34
Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 39
Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 35
Use headphones 36
Select a decoder to play back sources with 38
Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 36
Movie Dramatic
Currently selected
surround field program
33 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input
source
Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
A
MULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in
the front panel display.
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 54).
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source.
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the
front left and right channels.
■ Selecting the front speaker set
Use this feature to select the front speaker system
(FRONT A or FRONT B).
Press
9
SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front
speakers connected to the FRONT A or FRONT B
speaker terminals.
The activate front speaker set changes as follows:
Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front
speaker setting.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 48),
you can use the speakers connected to the FRONT B
speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).
Press
9
SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate
the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates
automatically (see page 38).
■ Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input
jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the
same input source.
y
• We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 55).
Press
E
AUDIO SELECT (or
B
AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack
select setting.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
This feature is not available when no digital input jacks are
assigned to the currently selected input source.
Additional operations
Notes
Note
FRONT A
FRONT B
Off
Notes
Note
A.SEL:AUTO
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
Audio input jack
select setting
34 En
Playback
■ Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
The DIRECT STEREO mode allows sources to bypass the
decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can
enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog
sources.
Press
C
DIRECT STEREO (or press
D
AMP and
then press
V
DIRECT ST.) to select “DIRECT
STEREO”.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when the DIRECT STEREO mode is selected.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• “TONE CONTROL” (on this page) and “SOUND MENU” (see
page 48) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not
effective.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Press
0
TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press
A
PROGRAM l / h (or
J
PROGl / h) to
adjust the corresponding frequency response
level.
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response.
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.
■ Adjusting speaker levels during
playback
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 24) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 50).
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
F
LEVEL
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
Once you press
F
LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing
G
k / n.
2 Press
G
l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
y
You can press
4
A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
Notes
Notes
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
35 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting the night listening mode
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
L
NIGHT
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic
range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to
hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-of-
listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press
G
l / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed in the front panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:
– when the DIRECT STEREO mode (see page 34) is selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the sound field program is selected while you enjoy
music contents in a USB memory device etc.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
■ Displaying signal information
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
Q
MENU on
the remote control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
G
n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press
G
ENTER.
The following information about the input source
appears in the OSD.
y
The information indicated by the cursor is also displayed in
the front panel display.
3 Press
Q
MENU again to exit from “SET
MENU”.
Notes
Display Description
FORMAT
Signal format.
SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken
from a continuous signal to make a
discrete signal.
CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the
input signal (front/surround/LFE).
BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point
per second.
FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital,
or PCM signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
SET MENU
TOP MENU
.;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
.A;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
;SIGNAL INFO
. FORMAT DolbyD
SAMPLING 48kHz
CHANNEL 3/2/0.1
BITRATE 384kbps
FLAG None
[RETURN]:Exit
36 En
Playback
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
■ Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 38).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
■ Muting the audio output
Press
O
MUTE to mute the audio output.
Press
O
MUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate
8
VOLUME (or press
R
VOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYPE” in
“SOUND MENU” (see page 51).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
■ Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer also automatically turns off any external
components connected to the AC OUTLETS (see
page 21).
Press
D
AMP and then press
P
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press
P
SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
y
• To cancel the sleep timer, press
P
SLEEP on the remote
control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front
panel display.
• You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing
1
STANDBY/ON (or
N
STANDBY) to set this unit to the
standby mode.
Notes
Audio sources
Video sources
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MULTI CH IN
DVD
V-AUX
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECT STEREOSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l
INPUT
hl
PROGRAM
h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
USB
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
37 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital
decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback
from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.
Press
A
PROGRAM l / h (or press
D
AMP and
then press
J
PROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
• You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by
pressing
U
ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 33).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode.
• The sound field program is canceled when the night listening
mode is selected while you enjoy music contents in a USB
memory device etc.
The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the
actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each
direction.
Sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
Category Program Features
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The
sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of
vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments.
Hall
HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program
uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful
reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.
Jazz
HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in
a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.
ENTERTAIN
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games.
The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where
you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies.
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with
a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come
clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a
comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.
MOVIE
Movie Spacious
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular
sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic
range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.
Movie Dramatic
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-
dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound
effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center
orientation of voices as pivots.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.
5ch Stereo
HiFi DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound
field suitable for background music at parties.
ENHANCER
Music Enh. 2ch
Music Enh. 5ch
Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in
2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating
the missing harmonics in a compression artifact.
Note
38 En
Sound field programs
■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the
standard decoders
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
Press
D
AMP and then press
K
SUR. DECODE
repeatedly to select a decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers by creating
virtual speakers.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 49),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see
page 37).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases:
– When “5ch Stereo” (see page 37) is selected.
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 37). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 33).
■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing. 2-
channel stereo sources are output from only the front left
and right speakers.
Press
B
STRAIGHT (or press
D
AMP and then
press
T
STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
B
STRAIGHT (or
T
STRAIGHT) again so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Note
Note
39 En
Sound field programs
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Editing sound fields parameters
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 While listening to a source, press
D
AMP
and then press Gk / n to select the desired
parameter.
2 Press
G
l / h to change the parameter
value.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”
in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 55).
y
Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,
Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:
DSP level DSP LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
For PRO LOGIC II Music:
Panorama PANORAMA
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for
a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
Dimension DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
Center width CT WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three
front speakers to varying degrees. A
larger value adjusts the center image
towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center channel
sound is output only from front left and
right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch
Effect level
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: LOW, HIGH
Note
FM/AM TUNING
40 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
automatic tuning is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/
TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
7
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
manual tuning is not possible. Press
2
PRESET/
TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
y
Hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Automatic tuning
AUTO
A
AM
1440
kHz
Lights up
No colon (:)
AUTO
TUNED
A
AM
1530
kHz
Lights up
Manual tuning
Note
A
AM
1440
kHz
No colon (:)
41 En
FM/AM tuning
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
3
FM/AM to select “FM” as the
reception band.
3 Press and hold
6
MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can select the preset station group and the preset station
number where the first received station will be stored by pressing
4
A/B/C/D/E and then
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See page 40 for tuning instructions.
2 Press
6
MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 10 seconds.
3 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E and
5
PRESET/
TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
6
MEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Automatic preset tuning
Notes
Flashes
Flash
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Manual preset tuning
Notes
TUNED
MEMORY
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
Preset station number
Flashes
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
TUNED
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
42 En
FM/AM tuning
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, press
C
TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press
4
A/B/C/D/E (or
G
A/B/C/D/E l / h)
repeatedly to select the desired preset
station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
G
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
y
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
4
A/B/C/D/E
and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
2 Press and hold
2
PRESET/TUNING for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using
4
A/B/C/D/
E and
5
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
4 Press
2
PRESET/TUNING again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Exchanging preset station
MEMORY
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
:
A5
FM
90.7
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
USING A USB MEMORY DEVICE OR A USB PORTABLE AUDIO PLAYER
43 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit.
■ Supported USB devices
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (except
USB hard disk drives) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
• Only the first partition (32 GB or less) is displayed in the OSD.
You cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
■ Connecting a USB memory device or a
USB potable audio player
Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on the
front panel of this unit.
Follow the procedures below to enjoy the music stored in
your USB device or a USB portable audio player.
1 Press
D
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
C
USB) to select USB.
The cursor on the left of the USB indicator lights up
in the front panel display, and the contents previously
played is automatically played.
2 Press
S
DISPLAY to display the top USB file
list.
The USB file list appears in the OSD.
y
•“i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• When this unit is in the top directory, “Root” appears
beside “USB”.
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECT STEREOSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
USB
USB memory device
or USB portable
audio player
Playback operation
INPUT:USB
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
USB
Lights up
Ellis Margellis >
Frankie Zipper >
Hall in Call >
Jackie Pastarius >
Jmiel >
Jean-Luc Ponta >
Jim Hallo >
1/7
USB Root
44 En
Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player
3 Press
G
k / n / l / h on the remote control
to select the desired file.
• Press
G
k / n to select the desired file/folder.
• Press
G
ENTER
or
G
h to enter the selected
folder.
• Press
G
l to return to the previous folder level.
4 Press
G
ENTER to play the selected file.
y
• You can use
I
b / a to skip backward/forward and
I
h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu
in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“USB PLAY STYLE” parameters in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 55).
• You can select the display mode in the front panel display by
using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 54).
■ The function of the play information
display
1 Name of the artist
2 Name of the album
3 Name of the song
4 Elapsed time
When the elapsed time exceed “99:59”, “--:--” appeared
instead of the time.
5 (playback) icon
6 (all repeat), (single repeat) icons
When “REPEAT” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION
MENU” (see page 55) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the
top right corner while files or folders are being played.
7 (shuffle) icon
When “SHUFFLE” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in
“OPTION MENU” (see page 55) is set to “OFF”, no icon
appears in the top right corner while files or holders are being
played.
Note
USB [Play]
FrankieZipper
. Made-to-orderaaaaaAA
;RoadtoIndiaaaAAAA
.A
00:00
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
All
1
RECORDING
45 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 34) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 34) and the sound field programs (see page 37) do
not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the USB jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if
your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your DVD recorder.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is
turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press
D
INPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
C
)) to
select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SET MENU
46 En
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 24).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
SET MENU
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B
terminals.
48
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
50
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the distance of each speaker.
50
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
51
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
51
F)D.RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
51
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level.
51
Parameter Features Page
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
52
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
53
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each input source.
53
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the
rear panel of this unit.
53
E)MULTI CH SET
Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
54
47 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 35).
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Press
D
AMP and then press
Q
MENU to
enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press
G
k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press
G
ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
4 Press
G
k / n / l / h and
G
ENTER to select
and change the parameter.
•Press
G
k / n to select the desired menu or
parameter.
•Press
G
l / h to change the parameter value.
•Press
G
ENTER to enter the selected menu or to
confirm the parameter.
•Press
H
RETURN to return to the previous menu
level.
5 Press
Q
MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
54
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
55
C)AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
55
D)PARAM. INI
Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the factory settings.
55
E)USB PLAY STYLE
Adjusts the playback style of a USB source.
55
Using SET MENU
SET MENU
TOPAMENU
.;AUTO SETUP
.A;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
SET MENU
TOPAMENU
;AUTO SETUP
.A;MANUAL SETUP
;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
;MANUAL SETUP
. 1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
48 En
SET MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the FRONT B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the FRONT B
terminals are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the FRONT B terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode (see page 38).
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
When the front speakers are large
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the front speakers are small
Select “SMALL” (small).
When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 49), you
can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of
“FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance,
this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the center speaker is large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the center speaker is small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
1 SOUND MENU
Notes
;MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 1/2
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SP LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
E)LFE LEVEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
;MANUAL SETUP
1 SOUND MENU 2/2
. F)D.RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT B;;;;FRONT
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
p
p
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:
large
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm
(6.5 in): small
Note
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT SP
SMALL >LARGE
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
NONE >SML LRG
49 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the surround speakers are large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the surround speakers are small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the surround speakers
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 38).
LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting (see page 48).
When you do not use a subwoofer
Select “FRONT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels,
and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left
and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”
setting (see page 48).
Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 47 and 48). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 47 and 48).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR. L/R SP
NONE >SML LRG
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR FRONT>BOTH
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
CROSSOVER
FREQ;;;80Hz
1 SOUND MENU
A)SPEAKER SET
SUBWOOFER PHASE
>NORMAL REVERSE
50 En
SET MENU
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting: feet (ft)
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FL
Front left speaker
FR
Front right speaker
C
Center speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
1 SOUND MENU
B)SP LEVEL 1/2
-
__________
+
. FL
FR
C
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
[
p
p
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
1 SOUND MENU
C)SP DISTANCE 1/2
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONT L;;;10.0ft
FRONT R;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;10.0ft
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
p
p
[
51 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Test tone
TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and
front left speakers.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 49),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
■ Dynamic range F)D.RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Mute type MUTE TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 36).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Note
1 SOUND MENU
D)CENTER GEQ
TEST >OFF ON
. 100Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
E)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
1 SOUND MENU
F)D.RANGE
. SP D.R;;;;MAX
HP D.R;;;;MAX
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
1 SOUND MENU
G)AUDIO SET
. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL
A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms
MAX VOL.;;;+16dB
INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
1 SOUND MENU
52 En
SET MENU
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This
feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by
mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16 dB
to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB,
the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.
Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB
Control step: 5 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX
VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to
–30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of
this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, –80 dB to +16 dB
Control step: 1 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting.
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the
decoder mode or rename the input source.
■ Input assignment
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs. Change the following
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using
D
INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons (C)).
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1
COAXIAL IN (1)
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3
OPTICAL IN (2)
OPTICAL IN (3)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DVR
You cannot select a specific item more than once.
Note
Note
2 INPUT MENU
Note
;MANUAL SETUP
2 INPUT MENU
. A)INPUT ASSIGN
B)INPUT RENAME
C)VOLUME TRIM
D)DECODER MODE
E)MULTI CH SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ENTER]:Enter
A)INPUT ASSIGN
COAXIAL IN
. (1);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
A)INPUT ASSIGN
OPTICAL IN
. (2);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
(3);;;;; CD
(CD)
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
53 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (
C
)
or
A
MULTI CH IN
to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press
D
AMP and then press
G
l / h on the
remote control to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press
G
k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press
G
l / h to move
to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press
G
n to change the character in the following order,
or press
G
k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press
G
ENTER to exit from “INPUT
RENAME”.
■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each
source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,
DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, USB,
MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used the connected input
source.
DTS decoder prioritize setting
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.
Notes
B)INPUT RENAME
DVD -> DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Position
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Chara.
p
p
2 INPUT MENU
MULTI CH IN
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
V-AUX USB
C)VOLUME TRIM
DVD
DVD ;;;;;;0.0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Adjust
p
[
[RETURN]:Exit
2 INPUT MENU
D)DECODER MODE
. >AUTO LAST
CD ;;;;AUTO
DVD ;;;;AUTO
DTV/CBL ;;;;AUTO
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
54 En
SET MENU
■ Multi channel input setup
E)MULTI CH SET
Background Video BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST
y
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last
selected video source as the background video source.
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
• Press
G
l to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press
G
h to make the front panel display brighter.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “USB” is selected as the input source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
•Press
G
l to raise the position of the OSD.
•Press
G
h to lower the position of the OSD.
Source feature OSD display time
OSD-SOURCE
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
USB file list and the play information in the OSD after
you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during
an operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Amplifier function OSD display time
OSD-AMP
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
status and sound field parameters information screen after
you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an
operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
3 OPTION MENU
E)MULTI CH SET
BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
2 INPUT MENU
;MANUAL SETUP
3 OPTION MENU
E)USB PLAY STYLE
p
p
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)MEMORY GUARD
C)AUDIO SELECT
D)PARAM. INI
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
A)DISPLAY SET
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
FL SCROLL;;;CONT
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
OSD-SOURCE;;;30s
OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
p
p
p
[
[ ]/[ ]:Select
3 OPTION MENU
55 En
SET MENU
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– sound field program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
– SCENE template parameters
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source (see page 33).
■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field
programs to the initial factory settings.
Choices: NO, YES
• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and
return to the previous menu screen.
• Select “YES” and then press
G
ENTER to set all the
sound field parameters to the initial factory settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.
■ USB playback styles E)USB PLAY STYLE
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle files in a random order or
repeat one specific file or a sequence of files.
Repeat REPEAT
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one file or a
sequence of files.
Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one file.
• Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
files.
Shuffle SHUFFLE
Use this feature to set this unit to play files or folders in a
random order.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “ON” to set this unit to play files or folders in a
random order.
Note
B)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF ON
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
C)AUDIO SELECT
>AUTO LAST
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
D)PARAM. INI
>NO YES
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
E)USB PLAY STYLE
. REPEAT.......OFF
SHUFFLE......OFF
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ ]/[ ]:Select
p
[
3 OPTION MENU
p
p
Remote control features
56 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 59).
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 59).
1 Press the desired
E
SCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
*
These buttons control the input source component. See page 58
for details of the function of each button.
■ Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Press and hold the
E
SCENE button and the
desired input selector button (
C
) for 3 seconds.
y
Press the
E
SCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
Remote control features
Using remote control on the SCENE feature
Note
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX USB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT EON
DIRECT ST.
*
SCENE
buttons
57 En
Remote control features
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Controlling this unit
Press
D
AMP to control this unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when
D
AMP is pressed.
■ Controlling a TV
Press
C
DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
DTV/CBL (see page 59).
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether
you press
C
DTV/CBL or not.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable
TV” column on page 58.
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX USB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT EON
DIRECT ST.
*1
*2
AMP
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV CH +/–
Changes the channel number.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX USB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT EON
DIRECT ST.
*1
*2
DTV/CBL
58 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to control
other components. You must set the appropriate remote
control code for each input source in advance (see
page 59). The following table shows the function of each
control button used to control other components assigned
to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 10 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 10
different components.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 59).
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
DVD
V-AUX USB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
AVTV
SCENE
4321
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCER
l
PROG
h
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT EON
DIRECT ST.
2
8
9
7
3
4
6
5
1
Remote
control
DVD
player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner USB
1 AV POWER
Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 TITLE
Title Band
3
PRESET/CH
k
Up
VCR channel
up
Up Preset up (1-8) Up
PRESET/CH
n
Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
Down
A/B/C/D/E
l
Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
Previous menu
A/B/C/D/E
h
Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
Subsequent
menu
ENTER Enter Enter
Subsequent
menu
4 RETURN
Return Return Previous menu
5 REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
f Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*2
Search forward Search forward Search forward
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward
Skip forward
*2
Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop
6 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
7 MENU
Menu Menu
8 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
9 ENT
Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
Notes
59 En
Remote control features
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 While pressing and holding one of the input
selector buttons (C) on the remote control to
select the input area you want to set up,
press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (
W
) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
Setting remote control codes
Input
source
Component
category
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD YAMAHA 5013
MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001
DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000
DTV/CBL – – –
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007
V-AU X – – –
USB USB YAMAHA 5012
DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011
–––
Note
Notes
DVD
V-AUX USB
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
POWER
AV
While holding down
Press for 3 seconds
Advanced setup
60 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your
listening environment.
•Only
1
STANDBY/ON and
B
STRAIGHT are effective while
you are using the advanced setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the
advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel
display.
1 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
4 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN
• Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 67).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Advanced setup
Notes
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8Ω MIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
6Ω MIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
Notes
Troubleshooting
61 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
13
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
12
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-20
No appropriate Audio input jack select has
been set.
Set an appropriate Audio input jack select.
33
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
D
INPUT
l / h on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons (C) on the remote control).
32, 33
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
12
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with
9
SPEAKERS on the
front panel.
33
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
O
MUTE or
R
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
36
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are
not output from any speaker terminals.
Make an analog or digital connection beside the
HDMI connection.
—
The setting of the connected component is
improper.
Make an appropriate setting following the instruction
manual of the connected component.
—
62 En
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance setting is correct.
13
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
O
MUTE or
R
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
36
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-20
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
34
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
This is not malfunction.
—
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”.
48
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
5ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
37
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is
set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
49
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
B
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
38
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET”
is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
49
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET”
is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
49
The source does not contain low-
frequency bass signals.
This is not malfunction.
—
63 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
33
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
You are attempting to set the volume level
higher than the maximum volume level.
Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting.
52
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
This is not malfunction.
—
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
16, 19
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION
MENU” is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
55
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
12
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This is not malfunction.
—
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
64 En
Troubleshooting
■ Tuner
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
20
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
40
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
41
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noise can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
24
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
65 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
During AUTO SETUP
After AUTO SETUP
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
• If a warning message “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If a warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made.
• If an error message “E-6” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections.
12
E-2:NO SUR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
12
E-3:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E-4:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
24
E-5:USER CANCEL
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
24
E-6:INTERNAL ERROR
An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
24
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
12
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the nearest speaker
and the furthest speaker is out of adjustable
range.
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive. (No level correction
is made.)
If “SWFR:TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:TOO
LOW” appears, adjust the output volume of
the subwoofer.
24
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections.
12
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Notes
66 En
Troubleshooting
■ USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be
viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device
cannot be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than a
USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device (except USB hard disk
drives) or USB portable audio player. Also note that it
cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they
are devices as described above.
43
Some devices may become easier to recognize when
they are inserted before turning this unit on.
21
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when
a USB device is
present.
This unit recognized the USB device as an
illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
21
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Disconnected
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
43
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
43
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Unable to play
No varied data is detected. Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
67 En
Troubleshooting
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
1 Press
1
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
0
TONE CONTROL and
then press
1
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“RESET”.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure without making any changes.
4 Press
1
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making
any changes, press
B
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“CANCEL” and then press
1
STANDBY/ON.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
23
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
59
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
59
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Notes
Glossary
68 En
■ Audio information
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right
and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1
channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
Glossary
69 En
Glossary
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP
technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of
movie theater in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field program so
that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even
without any surround speakers by using virtual surround
speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA
DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not
include a center speaker.
■ Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports
8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
Specifications
70 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 100 W
• Maximum Power for Front, Center, Surround (JEITA)
1kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 135 W
• Dynamic Power
(IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................. 110/130/160/180 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .................... 2.0 V or more
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
(1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 8 Ω ) ................................ 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (200 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB or more
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Phones Output .......................................................... 400 mV/470 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ........................................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F.
(FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP: SMALL/SML)
......................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray back) .............................................. NTSC
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more
• Maximum Input Level ........................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range ..................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply ........................................................ 120 V AC, 60 Hz
• Power Consumption .................................................. 240 W/320 VA
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.8 W or less
• AC Outlets ............................................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm
(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”)
• Weight .............................................................. 8.1 kg (17 lbs 14 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
71 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Numerics
1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 46
2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 46
2ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 37
3 OPTION MENU ............................... 54
3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 47
5ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 37
■ A
A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 54
A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT,
Input menu ....................................... 52
A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 48
A.DELAY, Audio settings ................... 51
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) ............. 21
AC OUTLETS, Rear panel .................. 10
AM antenna, Connection ..................... 20
AM tuning ............................................ 40
Amplifier function OSD display time,
Display settings ................................ 54
Audio components, Connection ........... 19
Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 51
AUDIO jacks ....................................... 14
Audio jacks .......................................... 14
AUDIO jacks, Rear panel .................... 10
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 33
Audio select, Option menu .................. 55
Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 51
AUTO SETUP ..................................... 24
AUTO SETUP, Error message ............ 64
AUTO: RESULT display,
Auto setup ........................................ 26
Automatic preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 41
Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 40
■ B
B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 53
B)MEMORY GUARD,
Option menu .................................... 55
B)SPEAKER LEVEL,
Sound menu ..................................... 50
Background Video,
Multi channel input setup ................ 54
BGV, Multi channel input setup .......... 54
BITRATE,
Input source information ................. 35
■ C
C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ...... 55
C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu .......... 50
C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu ......... 53
Cable TV, Connection ......................... 16
CD player, Connection ........................ 19
CD recorder, Connection ..................... 19
CENTER SP, Speaker settings ............ 48
Center speaker equalizer,
Sound menu ..................................... 51
Center speaker, Speaker settings ......... 48
Center width,
Sound field parameter ......................39
CHANNEL,
Input source information ..................35
CINEMA DSP indicator,
Front panel display ...........................22
COAXIAL IN (1),
Input assignment ..............................52
COAXIAL INPUT assignment,
Input assignment ..............................52
COAXIAL INPUT jacks ......................52
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............14
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks,
Connection .......................................18
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks,
Rear panel ........................................10
Connect MIC!,
Auto setup error message .................64
Connecting to the HDMI ......................17
Connection, AM antenna .....................20
Connection, Audio components ...........19
Connection, Cable TV ..........................16
Connection, CD player .........................19
Connection, CD recorder .....................19
Connection,
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........18
Connection, DVD player ......................16
Connection, DVD recorder ..................16
Connection, FM antenna ......................20
Connection, MD recorder .....................19
Connection,
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................19
Connection, Power cable ......................21
Connection, S VIDEO jacks ................18
Connection, Satellite tuner ...................16
Connection, Speaker ............................12
Connection, Video components ...........16
Connection, Video monitor ..................16
Controlling a TV, Remote control .......57
Controlling other components,
Remote control .................................58
Controlling this unit,
Remote control .................................57
Creating original SCENE templates .....31
CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ..........49
Crossover, Speaker settings .................49
CT WIDTH, Sound field parameter .....39
■ D
D)CENTER GEQ, Sound menu ...........51
D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ......53
D)PARAM. INI, Option menu .............55
Decoder mode, Input menu ..................53
Decoder select mode,
Decoder mode ..................................53
Default setting,
Remote control code ........................59
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ...14
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks .....14
DIGITAL INPUT jacks, Rear panel ....10
DIMENSION,
Sound field parameter ..................... 39
Dimension, Sound field parameter ...... 39
DIMMER, Display settings ................. 54
Dimmer, Display settings .................... 54
DIRECT STEREO ............................... 34
Direct Stereo ........................................ 34
Display settings, Option menu ............ 54
Display, Input source information ....... 35
DIST .................................................... 25
DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 25
DISTANCE ......................................... 25
DISTANCE, Auto setup ...................... 25
DSP LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ..................... 39
DSP level, Sound field parameter ....... 39
DTS decoder prioritize setting,
Decoder mode ................................. 53
DVD player, Connection ..................... 16
DVD recorder, Connection .................. 16
Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 51
■ E
E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 51
E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 54
E-1:NO FRONT SP,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
E-2:NO SURR.SP,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
E-3:NOISY,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
E-4:NO MIC,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
E-5:USER CANCEL,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
E-6:INTERNAL ERROR,
Auto setup error message ................ 65
Effect level, Sound field parameter ..... 39
ENHANCER indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Exchange, Preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................ 42
■ F
F)D. RANGE, Sound menu ................. 51
Factory presets, Advanced setup ......... 60
FL SCROLL, Display settings ............ 54
FLAG, Input source information ......... 35
FM antenna, Connection ..................... 20
FM tuning ............................................ 40
FORMAT, Input source information ... 35
FRONT B speaker setting,
Speaker settings ............................... 48
FRONT B, Speaker settings ................ 48
Front panel display .............................. 22
Front panel display scroll,
Display settings ............................... 54
FRONT SP, Speaker settings .............. 48
Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 48
Index
72 En
■ G
G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 51
Game .................................................... 37
■ H
Hall ....................................................... 37
HDMI ................................................... 15
HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ............. 15
HDMI jacks, Rear panel ...................... 10
Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 51
HEADPHONE,
Low-frequency effect level .............. 51
Headphone,
Low-frequency effect level .............. 51
Headphones indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Headphones, use .................................. 36
HiFi DSP indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
HP, Dynamic range .............................. 51
■ I
Infrared window, Remote control ........ 23
INI.VOL., Audio settings .................... 52
Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 52
Input assignment, Input menu .............. 52
Input channel and speaker indicators,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Input channel indicators,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Input menu, Manual setup ................... 46
Input rename, Input menu .................... 53
Input source indicators,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Input source information display ......... 35
■ J
Jazz ....................................................... 37
■ L
LFE indicator, Front panel display ...... 22
LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ...... 49
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ........... 49
Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu
51
LVL ...................................................... 25
LVL, Auto setup result ........................ 25
■ M
Manual preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 41
MANUAL SETUP, SET MENU ......... 46
Manual setup, SET MENU .................. 46
Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ........... 40
MAX VOL., Audio settings ................. 52
Maximum volume, Audio settings ....... 52
MD recorder, Connection .................... 19
Memory guard, Option menu ............... 55
Movie Dramatic ................................... 37
Movie Spacious .................................... 37
MULTI CH INPUT jacks,
Connection ....................................... 19
MULTI CH INPUT jacks,
Rear panel ........................................ 10
Multi channel input setup,
Input menu .......................................54
Multi-channel source
with headphones ..............................38
Multi-information display,
Front panel display ...........................22
Music Enh. 2ch,
Sound field program ........................37
Music Enh. 5ch,
Sound field program ........................37
MUTE indicator,
Front panel display ...........................22
MUTE TYPE, Audio settings ..............51
Muting ..................................................36
■ N
NIGHT indicator,
Front panel display ...........................22
Night listening mode ............................35
Number of speakers .............................25
Number of speakers,
Auto setup result ..............................25
■ O
OPTICAL IN (2) ..................................52
OPTICAL IN (2), Input assignment ....52
OPTICAL IN (3), Input assignment ....52
OPTICAL INPUT assignment,
Input assignment ..............................52
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, Auto setup .....24
Optimizer microphone .........................24
Optimizer microphone, Auto setup ......24
Optimizing speaker setting ...................24
Option menu, Manual setup .................47
OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 54
OSD shift, Display settings ..................54
OSD-AMP, Display settings ................54
OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........54
Other components controlling
by remote control .............................58
Other components controlling,
Remote control .................................58
■ P
PANORAMA,
Sound field parameter ......................39
Panorama, Sound field parameter ........39
Parameter initialization,
Option menu ....................................55
PCM indicator, Front panel display .....22
PHONES jack ......................................36
Play information display,
USB controlling ...............................44
Playing video sources
in the background .............................36
PLII Game ............................................38
PLII Movie ...........................................38
PLII Music ...........................................38
Pop/Rock ..............................................37
Power cable, Connection ......................21
Preset station exchange,
FM/AM tuning .................................42
Preset station selection,
FM/AM tuning .................................42
PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 60
Pro Logic ............................................. 38
Pure hi-fi stereo sound ......................... 34
■ R
Remote control code default setting .... 59
Remote control code setting ................ 59
Remote control codes ........................... iii
Remote control codes setting .............. 59
Remote control, Troubleshooting ........ 67
Rename, SCENE template .................. 31
Resetting the system ............................ 67
■ S
S VIDEO jacks .................................... 14
S VIDEO jacks, Connection ................ 18
SAMPLING,
Input source information ................. 35
Satellite tuner, Connection .................. 16
SCENE 1 ............................................... 8
SCENE 2 ............................................... 8
SCENE 3 ............................................... 8
SCENE 4 ............................................... 9
SCENE template selection .................. 28
Selection, Audio input jack ................. 33
Selection, Preset station,
FM/AM tuning ................................ 42
Selection, SCENE template ................. 28
SET MENU ......................................... 46
Setting remote control code ................. 59
Setting SCENE template input source,
Remote control ................................ 56
Setting the speaker impedance ............ 13
SIGNAL INFO, SET MENU .............. 35
SILENT CINEMA .............................. 38
SILENT CINEMA indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
SIZE ..................................................... 25
SIZE, Auto setup ................................. 25
SLEEP indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Sleep timer ........................................... 36
Sound field programs
with headphones .............................. 38
Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 46
Source feature OSD display time,
Display settings ............................... 54
SP ......................................................... 25
SP A B indicators,
Front panel display .......................... 22
SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 60
SP, Auto setup result ........................... 25
SP, Dynamic range .............................. 51
Speaker distance .................................. 25
Speaker distance, Auto setup ............... 25
Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 25
Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 50
Speaker distances,
Speaker distance .............................. 50
Speaker impedance,
Advanced setup ............................... 60
Speaker level ....................................... 25
Speaker level adjustment ..................... 34
Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 25
73 En
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Speaker level, Sound menu .................. 50
Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 48
Speaker size ......................................... 25
Speaker size, Auto setup ...................... 25
Speaker wiring ..................................... 25
Speaker wiring, Auto setup .................. 25
Speaker wiring/volume level,
Auto setup ........................................ 25
Speaker, Connection ............................ 12
Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 51
SPEAKER,
Low-frequency effect level .............. 51
Speaker,
Low-frequency effect level .............. 51
SPEAKERS terminals, Rear panel ...... 10
Specifications ....................................... 70
STRAIGHT .......................................... 38
Straight ................................................. 38
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack,
Rear panel ........................................ 10
SUBWOOFER PHASE,
Speaker settings ............................... 49
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 49
Supplied accessories .............................. 3
SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 49
Surround left/right speakers,
Speaker settings ............................... 49
■ T
Test tone, Center speaker equalizer ..... 51
TEST, Center speaker equalizer .......... 51
Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 34
Troubleshooting ................................... 61
Tuner (FM/AM), Troubleshooting ...... 64
Tuner indicators,
Front panel display .......................... 22
Turning off the power .......................... 21
Turning on the power ........................... 21
TV controlling by remote control ........ 57
TV controlling, Remote control ........... 57
TV Sports ............................................. 37
■ U
UNIT, Speaker distance ....................... 50
Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 50
Unplug HP!,
Auto setup error message ................ 64
USB memory device using,
USB portable audio player using ..... 43
USB playback operation ...................... 43
USB playback styles ............................ 55
USB, Troubleshooting ......................... 66
■ V
VIDEO AUX jacks, Front panel .......... 20
Video components, Connection ........... 16
VIDEO jacks ........................................ 14
Video jacks .......................................... 14
VIDEO jacks, Rear panel ..................... 10
Video monitor, Connection .................. 16
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 38
VIRTUAL indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 22
VOLUME level indicator,
Front panel display ...........................22
Volume Trim, Input menu ....................53
■ W
W-1:OUT OF PHASE,
Auto setup error message .................65
W-2:DISTANCE ERROR,
Auto setup error message .................65
W-3:LEVEL ERROR,
Auto setup error message .................65
WIRING/LEVEL .................................25
WIRING/LEVEL, Auto setup ..............25
■ Y
Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer .........................................24
YPAO ...................................................24
YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer) .........................24
YPAO indicator,
Front panel display ...........................22
■ Z
Zone B ..................................................33
i
Front panel
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECT STEREOSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
1 34 5
8
9 DA C E FB
2
0
76
ii
APPENDIX
Remote control
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT
DIRECT ST.
EON
V-AUX USB
R
K
O
J
H
A
P
U
V
W
N
B
L
C
E
D
I
F
G
Q
T
S
M
Y
X
iii
List of remote control codes
TV
ACER 0093
ACME 0207
ACURA 0208
ADA 0255
ADC 0206
ADMIRAL 0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
ADYSON 0200, 0207
AGASHI 0200
AGAZI 0206
AGB 0204
AIKO 0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
AIWA 0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
AKAI 0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
AKIBA 0209, 0218
AKURA 0206, 0209, 0218
ALARON 0200
ALBA 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
ALBIRAL 0212
ALLSTAR 0213
AMPLIVISION
0207
AMSTRAD 0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
AMTRON 0062
ANAM 0208
ANAM NATIONAL
0062
ANGLO 0208
ANITECH 0206, 0208
ANSONIC 0203, 0208
AOC 0060, 0061
APEX 0118, 0122, 0132
ARC EN CIEL 0216
ARCAM 0200
ARCAM DELTA
0207
ARISTONA 0213, 0217
ASA 0205, 0211
ASBERG 0213
ASTRA 0208
ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
ATORI 0208
AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
AUDIOTON 0207
AUDIOVOX 0062
AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207
AWA 0200
BAIRD 0216
BANG & OLUFSEN
0205
BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
BASTIDE 0207
BAUR 0217
BEKO 0228
BELCOR 0060
BELL & HOWELL
0058, 0064
BENQ 0051, 0081
BEON 0213, 0217
BESTAR 0213
BINATONE 0207
BLACK STAR 0214
BLAUPUNKT 0255
BLUE SKY 0209, 0218
BONDSTEC 0214
BOOTS 0207
BRADFORD 0062
BRANDT 0216, 0226
BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217
BRITANNIA 0200, 0207
BROCKWOOD
0060
BROKSONIC 0138
BRUNS 0205
BSR 0215
BTC 0209, 0218
BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
CANDLE 0060, 0061
CAPSONIC 0206
CASCADE 0208
CATHAY 0213, 0217
CCE 0127
CELEBRITY 0059
CENTURION 0213, 0217
CENTURY 0205
CGE 0214, 0215
CIMLINE 0208, 0218
CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
CITY 0208
CLARIVOX 0212, 0217
CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
CMS 0200
COLORTYME 0060, 0061
CONCERTO 0060, 0061
CONCORDE 0208
CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213
CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208
CONTEC/CONY
0062
CONTINENTAL EDISON
0216
COSMEL 0208
CRAIG 0062
CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215
CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
CS ELECTRONICS
0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC 0214
CURTIS MATHES
0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC 0062
CYBERTRON 0209, 0218
DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
DAINICHI 0200, 0209, 0218
DANSAI 0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
DANTAX 0217
DAYTRON 0060, 0061, 0208
DE GRAAF 0210
DECCA 0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
DESMET 0213, 0217
DIAMOND 0200
DIMENSIA 0057
DIXI 0208, 0213, 0217
DTS 0208
DUAL 0207, 0215, 0216
DUAL-TEC 0207, 0208, 0215
DUMONT 0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
DURABRAND
0126
DUX 0217
DYNATRON 0213, 0217
ELBE 0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
ELBE-SHARP 0204
ELCIT 0204, 0205
ELECTRO TECH
0208
ELECTROBAND
0059
ELECTROHOME
0059, 0060, 0061
ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218
ELMAN 0215
ELTA 0200, 0208
EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
ENVISION 0060, 0061
ERRES 0213, 0217
ESA 0080
ETRON 0208
EURO-FEEL 0206
EUROLINE 0217
EUROMAN 0200
EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213
EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
FENNER 0208
FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226
FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210
FINLANDIA 0210
FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
FLINT 0213, 0218
FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0200
FORTRESS 0205
FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
FUTURETECH
0062
GATEWAY 0094
GBC 0208, 0215, 0218
GE 0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215
GENERAL TECHNIC
0208
GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
GIBRALTER 0060
GOLDHAND 0200
GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
GPM 0209, 0218
GRAETZ 0211
GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217
GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
GRUNPY 0062
HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207
HALLMARK 0060, 0061
HAMPTON 0200, 0207
HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
HANTAREX 0204, 0208
HARVARD 0062
HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
HIFIVOX 0216
HIGASHI 0200
HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
HISAWA 0209, 0218
HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
HORNYPHON 0213
HOSHAI 0209, 0218
HUANYU 0200, 0207
HYGASHI 0200, 0207
HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
ICES 0200, 0218
IMA 0062
IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
INDIANA 0213, 0217
INFINITY 0063
INGELEN 0211
INGERSOL 0208
INNO HIT 0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
INNOVATION 0206, 0208
INTERBUY 0208, 0214
INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
iv
APPENDIX
INTERNATIONAL
0200
INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218
IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
ISUKAI 0209, 0218
ITC 0207, 0215
ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
ITT 0129, 0208, 0211
ITV 0208, 0217
JBL 0063
JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061
JCB 0059
JENSEN 0060, 0061
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
KAMOSONIC 0207
KAMP 0200, 0207
KAPSCH 0211
KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
KENDO 0128, 0210
KENNEDY 0215
KENWOOD 0060, 0061
KINGSLEY 0200, 0207
KLOSS NOVABEAM
0062
KNEISSEL 0203
KOLSTER 0213
KONKA 0209, 0218
KORPEL 0213, 0217
KORTING 0205
KOYODA 0208
KTV 0062, 0127, 0207
KYOTO 0200, 0212
LENCO 0208
LENOIR 0207, 0208
LESA 0214
LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
LIESENK 0217
LIFE 0206, 0208
LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218
LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217
LOGIK 0058
LUMA 0210, 0217
LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217
LUX MAY 0213
LUXMAN 0060, 0061
LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210
LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
MAG 0050
MAGNADYNE
0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207
MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
MAGNUM 0206, 0208
MAJESTIC 0058
MANDOR 0206
MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
MARELLI 0205
MARK 0200, 0213, 0217
MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
MEDIATOR 0213, 0217
MEDION 0206, 0208
MEGATRON 0061
MELECTRONIC
0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
MEMPHIS 0208
METZ 0205
MGA 0060, 0061
MICROMAXX 0206, 0208
MICROSTAR 0206, 0208
MINERVA 0204
MINOKA 0213
MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
MONTGOMERY WARD
0058
MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
MULTI SYSTEM
0217
MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
MURPHY 0200, 0207
NAD 0061
NAONIS 0210
NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
NECKERMANN
0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
NEI 0213, 0217
NESCO 0214
NET-TV 0082, 0101
NEW TECH 0208, 0213
NEW WORLD 0209, 0218
NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207
NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
NIKKO 0061
NOBLIKO 0200, 0207
NOGAMATIC 0216
NOKIA 0129, 0211
NORDMENDE
0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
NORDVISION 0217
OCEANIC 0211
OLEVIA 0052, 0084
ONCEAS 0207
ONWA 0062, 0218
ORBIT 0213
ORION 0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
ORLINE 0218
ORSOWE 0204
OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
OSIO 0201
OSO 0209, 0218
OSUME 0218
OTTO VERSAND
0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
PAEL 0200, 0207
PALLADIUM 0207
PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
PATHE CINEMA
0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
PATHE MARCONI
0212, 0216
PAUSA 0208
PERDIO 0200
PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
PHILHARMONIC
0207
PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063,
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
PHILIPS MAGNAVOX
0124
PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
PILOT 0060
PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
PLANTRON 0206, 0213
POLAROID 0075
POPPY 0208
PORTLAND 0060, 0061
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0204, 0210
PRECISION 0207
PRIMA 0208, 0211
PROFEX 0208
PROFI-TRONIC
0213
PROLINE 0213
PROSCAN 0057
PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217
PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
PROTON 0060, 0061
PROVIEW 0050
PROVISION 0217
PULSAR 0060
PYE 0213, 0217
PYMI 0208
QUASAR 0152, 0214
QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
RADIALVA 0218
RADIO SHACK
0064
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
0057, 0060, 0061,
0062, 0064
RADIOLA 0213, 0217
RADIOMARELLI
0204, 0205, 0214
RADIOTONE 0213
RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
REALISTIC 0064
REVOX 0213, 0217
REX 0206, 0210, 0211
RFT 0203, 0205
RHAPSODY 0200
R-LINE 0213, 0217
ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
ROBOTRON 0205
ROWA 0200
RTF 0205
SABA 0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
SACCS 0212
SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
SAMBERS 0204
SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
SANDRA 0200, 0207
SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213
SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
SBR 0217
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
SCOTCH 0061
SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062
SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
SEI 0204
SEI-SINUDYNE
0204, 0205, 0211
SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215
SENCORA 0208
SENTRA 0218
SERINO 0200
v
SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
SHOGUN 0060
SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215
SICATEL 0212
SIEMENS 0255
SIERRA 0213
SIGNATURE 0058
SILVA 0200
SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215
SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
SKANTIC 0211
SOLAVOX 0211
SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
SONOLOR 0211
SONTEC 0213, 0217
SONY 0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
SOUND & VISION
0209, 0218
SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062
SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217
SSS 0060, 0062
STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
STARLIGHT 0217
STARLITE 0062
STENWAY 0218
STERN 0210, 0211
SUNKAI 0208, 0218
SUNWOOD 0208, 0213
SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207
SUPERTECH 0200
SUPRA 0208
SUPREME 0059
SUSUMU 0209
SUTRON 0208
SYDNEY 0200, 0207
SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080
SYSLINE 0217
SYTONG 0200
TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210
TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
TCM 0206, 0208
TEAC 0127
TEC 0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
TECHWOOD 0060, 0061
TEKNIKA 0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
TELEAVIA 0216
TELECOR 0218
TELEFUNKEN
0065, 0213, 0216
TELEGAZI 0218
TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217
TELETON 0207
TELEVIDEON 0200
TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
TESMET 0213
TEVION 0206, 0208
TEXET 0200, 0207
THOMSON 0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
THORN 0212, 0217
TMK 0060, 0061
TOKAI 0213
TOKYO 0200, 0207
TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
TOWADA 0211, 0215
TRANSTEC 0200
TRIDENT 0204
TRISTAR 0218
TRIUMPH 0204
UHER 0211, 0213
ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
UNITED 0217
UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
UNIVOX 0212
VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
VEXA 0208, 0217
VICTOR 0213
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
VIDEOLOGIQUE
0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
VIDEOSAT 0214
VIDEOSYSTEM
0213
VIDEOTECHNIC
0200
VIDTECH 0060, 0061
VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
VISIOLA 0200, 0207
VISION 0213
VORTEC 0213, 0217
VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
WALTHAM 0207, 0212
WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218
WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
WEGA 0205
WELTBLICK 0213, 0217
WESTON 0215
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0008, 0200, 0207,
0217
WINCOM 0055, 0056
YAMAHA 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0005, 0060,
0061
YAMISHI 0218
YOKO 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
YORX 0209, 0218
ZANUSSI 0210
ZENITH 0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
TV/DVD COMBO
AIWA 0139, 2055
APEX 0132, 2049
BROKSONIC 0138, 2060
BUSH 0230, 2112
JVC 0136, 2053
PANASONIC 0137, 2054, 0254,
2110
RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
SYLVANIA 0134, 2052
THOMSON 0226, 2109
TOSHIBA 0131, 2048, 0231,
2111
TV/DVD/VCR COMBO
PANASONIC 0141, 1040, 2057
SAMSUNG 0241, 1070, 2113
SHARP 0143, 1028, 2059
SYLVANIA 0142, 1041, 2058
TOSHIBA 0140, 1029, 2056
TV/VCR COMBO
AIWA 0237, 1066
BUSH 0237, 1066
DAEWOO 0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
GE 0147, 1030
GOODMANS 0240, 1069
GRUNDIG 0236, 1062
HITACHI 0156, 1039
JVC 0153, 1036
MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033
ORION 0235, 1065
PANASONIC 0151, 1034
PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
QUASAR 0152, 1035
RCA 0149, 1032
ROADSTAR 0237, 1066
SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
SHARP 0145, 1028
SONY 0234, 1064
SYLVANIA 0148, 1031
TATUNG 0237, 1066
TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
ZENITH 0154, 1037
DVD/VCR COMBO
JVC 1017, 1017, 2045,
2045
LG 1071, 2087
PANASONIC 1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
PHILIPS 1025, 2046
RCA 1022, 2042
SAMSUNG 1021, 1021, 2041,
2104
SHARP 1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
SONY 1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
TOSHIBA 1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
ZENITH 1026, 2047
VCR
ADMIRAL 1008, 1013
ADVENTURA
1005
AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
AKAI 1007, 1043
AKIBA 1050
AKURA 1043, 1050
ALBA 1044, 1050
AMERICAN HIGH
1004
AMSTRAD 1042
ANITECH 1050
ASA 1045, 1046
ASHA 1002, 1014
ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
AUDIO DYNAMICS
1000
AUDIOVOX 1003
BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047
BASIC LINE 1044, 1050
BAUR 1046
BEAUMARK 1002, 1014
BELL & HOWELL
1001
BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048
BROKSONIC 1012, 1013
BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066
CALIX 1003
CANDLE 1002, 1003
CANON 1004
CCE 1006
CGE 1042, 1043
CIMLINE 1044, 1050
CITIZEN 1002, 1003
COLORTYME 1000
COLT 1006
CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
CROWN 1050
CURTIS MATHES
1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
CYBERNEX 1002, 1014
DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
DANSAI 1050
DANTAX 1044
DBX 1000
DE GRAAF 1046, 1049
DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046
DENON 1010
DIMENSIA 1009
DUAL 1043, 1046
DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
DYNATECH 1005
ELECTROHOME
1003
ELECTROPHONIC
1003
ELTA 1050
EMERSON 1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
ETZUKO 1050
FERGUSON 1043
FIDELITY 1042
FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049
FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
FISHER 1001, 1047
FLINT 1044
FORMENTI/PHOENIX
1046
FUJI 1004
FUJITSU 1042
FUNAI 1005, 1042
GALAXY 1042
GARRARD 1005
GBC 1050
vi
APPENDIX
GE 1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
GEC 1046
GELOSO 1050
GENERAL TECHNIC
1044, 1048
GO VIDEO 1014
GOLDHAND 1050
GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
GRADIENTE 1005
GRAETZ 1043, 1047
GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049
GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050
GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062
HANSEATIC 1045, 1046
HARLEY DAVIDSON
1005
HARMAN/KARDON
1000
HARWOOD 1006
HCM 1050
HEADQUARTER
1001
HINARI 1044, 1050
HISAWA 1044
HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
1010
HYPSON 1044, 1050
IMPERIAL 1042
INNO HIT 1046, 1050
INNOVATION 1044, 1048
INSTANT REPLAY
1004
INTERBUY 1045
INTERFUNK 1046, 1047
INTERVISION 1042
IRRADIO 1045, 1050
ITT 1043, 1047
ITV 1045
JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
JCL 1004
JENSEN 1007
JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
KAISUI 1050
KARCHER 1046
KENDO 1044
KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
KODAK 1003, 1004
KORPEL 1050
LEYCO 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
LIFETEC 1044, 1048
LLOYD'S 1005
LOEWE 1048
LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046
LOGIK 1006, 1050
LUXOR 1047
LXI 1003
M ELECTRONIC
1042
MAGNASONIC
1047
MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033
MAGNIN 1003, 1014
MANESTH 1050
MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
MARTA 1003
MATSUI 1044, 1045
MATSUSHITA 1004
MEDIATOR 1046
MEDION 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
MEMPHIS 1050
METZ 1048
MGA 1014
MGN TECHNOLOGY
1002, 1014
MICROMAXX 1044, 1048
MICROSTAR 1044, 1048
MIGROS 1042
MINOLTA 1010
MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046
MONTGOMERY WARD
1008
MOTOROLA 1004, 1008
MTC 1002, 1014
MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
MURPHY 1042
NATIONAL 1048
NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
NECKERMANN
1043, 1046
NEI 1046
NESCO 1050
NIKKO 1003
NOBLEX 1002, 1014
NOKIA 1043, 1047
NORDMENDE
1043
OCEANIC 1042, 1043
OKANO 1044
OLYMPUS 1004
OPTIMUS 1003, 1008
ORION 1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
ORSON 1042
OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050
OTTO VERSAND
1046
PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050
PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
PATHE MARCONI
1043
PENNEY 1010, 1014
PENTAX 1010, 1049
PERDIO 1042
PHILCO 1004, 1051
PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
PHILIPS MAGNAVOX
1018
PHONOLA 1046
PILOT 1003
PIONEER 1011, 1046
PRINZ 1042
PROFEX 1050
PROFITRONIC
1014
PROLINE 1042
PROSCAN 1009
PROSONIC 1044
PROTEC 1006
PYE 1046, 1056
QUARTER 1001
QUARTZ 1001, 1047
QUASAR 1004, 1035
QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047
RADIO SHACK
1003
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
RADIOLA 1046
RADIX 1003
RANDEX 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
REX 1043
RFT 1046
ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066
SABA 1043
SAISHO 1044, 1050
SALORA 1047
SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
SANKY 1008
SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
SBR 1046
SCHAUB LORENZ
1042, 1043, 1047
SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
SCOTT 1012
SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
SEG 1050
SEI-SINUDYNE
1046
SELECO 1043
SENTRON 1050
SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050
SHIVAKI 1045
SHOGUN 1002, 1014
SIEMENS 1045, 1047
SIGNATURE 2000
1008
SILVA 1045
SINGER 1004, 1006
SINUDYNE 1046
SONTEC 1045
SONY 1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
STS 1004, 1010
SUNKAI 1044
SUNSTAR 1042
SUNTRONIC 1042
SUNWOOD 1050
SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
SYMPHONIC 1005
TAISHO 1044
TANDY 1001
TASHIKO 1003, 1042
TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
TCM 1044, 1048
TEAC 1005, 1007
TECHNICS 1004, 1048
TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005
TELEAVIA 1043
TELEFUNKEN
1043
TENOSAL 1050
TENSAI 1042, 1045, 1050
TEVION 1044, 1048
THOMSON 1043, 1058
THORN 1043, 1047
TMK 1002, 1014
TOKAI 1045, 1050
TONSAI 1050
TOSHIBA 1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014
TOWADA 1050
TOWIKA 1050
UHER 1045
UNITECH 1002, 1014
UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046
VECTOR RESEARCH
1000
VIDEO CONCEPTS
1000
VIDEON 1044, 1048
VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014
WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
WELTBLICK 1045
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
1013
XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006
YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007
YAMISHI 1050
YOKAN 1050
YOKO 1045, 1050
ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037
DVD
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
2078
AIWA 2055, 2100
AKAI 2096
AKURA 2076
ALBA 2078, 2086
APEX 2027, 2049
AWA 2078
AXION 2078
BRAINWAVE 2096
BRANDT 2073, 2085
BROKSONIC 2060
BUSH 2075, 2078, 2112
CENTREX 2077
CLASSIC 2078
CLATRONIC 2075
COBY 2078
C-TECH 2074
CYBERHOME
2025, 2079, 2091
DAEWOO 2092, 2098
DANSAI 2096
DAYTEK 2080, 2089
DEC 2075
DENON 2030, 2102, 2103
DENVER 2075, 2076
DIAMOND 2074
DK DIGITAL 2094
DUAL 2078
D-VISION 2096
DVX 2074
ELTA 2096
EUROLINE 2096
FUNAI 2052, 2058
GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
2074
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in China
WK65630
GLOBAL SPHERE
2074
GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078
GRUNDIG 2077, 2098
H&B 2075
HAAZ 2074
HE 2078
HITACHI 2032, 2072
HOME ELECTRONICS
2078
INNOVATION 2072
IRRADIO 2134
JDB 2078
JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
KENWOOD 2030, 2097
KINGAVON 2075
KODA 2075
LAWSON 2074
LENCO 2075
LG 2084, 2087
LIFETEC 2072
LIMIT 2074
LOGICLAB 2074
LUXOR 2077
MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075
MAGNUM 2072
MBO 2078
MEDION 2072
MICROMAXX
2072
MICROMEDIA
2073
MICROSTAR 2072
MITSUBISHI 2035
MIZUDA 2075
MUSTEK 2078
NAIKO 2077
ONKYO 2073, 2135
ORAVA 2075
P&B 2075
PACIFIC 2074
PANASONIC 2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
PIONEER 2036, 2082
PROLINE 2077
PROVISION 2075
RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
RED STAR 2076
REOC 2074
ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086
ROWA 2077
SABA 2085
SABAKI 2074
SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
SANSUI 2074
SANYO 2095
SCANMAGIC 2078
SCIENTIFIC LABS
2074
SCOTT 2088
SEG 2074, 2086
SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
SILVA 2076
SINGER 2074
SKYMASTER 2074, 2078
SKYWORTH 2076
SM ELECTRONIC
2074, 2078
SONY 2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
SOUNDMASTER
2074
SOUNDMAX 2074
STANDARD 2074
STAR CLUSTER
2074
STARMEDIA 2075
SUPERVISION
2074, 2078
SYLVANIA 2052, 2058
SYNN 2074
TCM 2072
TEAC 2074
TEC 2076
TECHNICS 2030
TECHNIKA 2096
TECHNOSONIC
2096
TEVION 2072, 2074
THOMSON 2085, 2109
TOKAI 2076
TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
UNITED 2078
VOXSON 2078
WHARFEDALE
2074
XLOGIC 2074
YAKUMO 2077
YAMADA 2077
YAMAHA 2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
YUKAI 2078
ZENITH 2038, 2047, 2073
DVD-DVR
PANASONIC 2067
PIONEER 2114
SAMSUNG 2115
TOSHIBA 2068
DVD/LD COMBO
PIONEER 2036
DVD RECORDER
APEX 2024
JVC 2070
LG 2071
PANASONIC 2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
PHILIPS 2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
PIONEER 2021
RCA 2018
SONY 2022, 2064
TOSHIBA 2068
YAMAHA 2023
YUKAI 2069
DVR
ABS 2132
ALIENWARE 2132
CYBERPOWER
2132
DELL 2132
DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
DISH NETWORK
2126, 2127
DISHPRO 2126
ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127
EXPRESSVU 2126
GATEWAY 2132
GOI 2126
HEWLETT PACKARD
2132
HITACHI 2008
HOWARD COMPUTERS
2132
HTS 2126
HUGHES 2123, 2128
HUMAX 2123
HUSH 2132
IBUYPOWER 2132
JVC 2126, 2127
LINKSYS 2132
MEDIA CENTER PC
2132
MICROSOFT 2132
MIND 2132
NIVEUS MEDIA
2132
NORTHGATE 2132
PANASONIC 2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014
PROSCAN 2129
RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120
SHARP 2009, 2010
SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120
SONY 2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
STACK 9 2132
SYSTEMAX 2132
TAGAR SYSTEMS
2132
TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132
TOUCH 2132
ULTIMATETV 2133
VIEWSONIC 2132
VOODOO 2132
YAMAHA 2011
ZT GROUP 2132
LD PLAYER
YAMAHA 2002
CD PLAYER
YAMAHA 5000, 5013
CD RECORDER
YAMAHA 5001
MD
YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004
TAPE DECK
YAMAHA 5005, 5006
TUNER
YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
■ Front panel/Face avant
HTR-6050
UC
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
OPTIMIZER MIC
AUDIO SELECT
DIRECT STEREOSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX USB
1 34 5
8
9 DA C E FB
2
0
76
00_Sheet_RHTR-6050_UC.book Page 1 Saturday, May 19, 2007 2:35 PM
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande
WK65650
Printed in China
REC
SUR.DECODE NIGHT
STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP MUTE
MULTI CH IN
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
FREQ/TEXT
DIRECT ST.
EON
V-AUX USB
R
K
O
J
H
A
P
U
V
W
N
B
L
C
E
D
I
F
G
Q
T
S
M
Y
X
00_Sheet_RHTR-6050_UC.book Page i Saturday, May 19, 2007 2:35 PM
Documenttranscriptie
U HTR-6050 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Important safety instructions 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, Important safety instructions d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Caution-iii En 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 20 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 PREPARATION Connections ........................................................... 10 Using SET MENU................................................... 47 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 48 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 52 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 54 Remote control features........................................56 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 56 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components........ 57 Setting remote control codes ................................... 59 Advanced setup......................................................60 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting.....................................................61 Glossary..................................................................68 Specifications .........................................................70 Index .......................................................................71 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 24 Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 28 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 31 Playback ................................................................ 32 Basic operations....................................................... 32 Additional operations............................................... 33 Sound field programs ........................................... 37 Sound field program descriptions............................ 37 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 40 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ........................... 43 Playback operation................................................... 43 Recording .............................................................. 45 APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 40 Manual tuning.......................................................... 40 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 41 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 41 Selecting preset stations........................................... 42 Exchanging preset station ........................................ 42 About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “9 SPEAKERS” or “A MULTI CH IN” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the appendix pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room .................................... 24 Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 28 BASIC OPERATION Rear panel ................................................................ 10 Placing speakers....................................................... 11 Connecting speakers ................................................ 12 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14 Information on HDMI™.......................................... 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ........ 20 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20 Connecting the power cable..................................... 21 Turning on and off the power .................................. 21 Front panel display .................................................. 22 SET MENU ............................................................46 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................ 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button .................................... 8 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION English 1 En Features Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ Minimum RMS output power [Front, Center, Surround channels] 100 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ SCENE template customizing capability ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ◆ MP3, WMA and WAV capability Decoders and DSP circuits Other features ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multichannel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ DTS decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ ◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ Direct Stereo mode for pure hi-fi sound for analog and PCM 2-channel sources ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. USB features “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. This unit is equipped with the technologies developed by Analog Devices, Inc. and others. It is strictly prohibited to use this unit for use other than audiovisual purposes. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. 2 En Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER MUTE AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 V-AUX Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) 1 AM loop antenna 3 TV CH USB INTRODUCTION ■ Checking the supplied accessories TV VOL SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 VOLUME MENU Optimizer microphone ENTER DISPLAY RETURN 2 Indoor FM antenna REC FREQ/TEXT l 1 EON PROG h 2 MODE – PTY SEEK – START ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 DIRECT ST. SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Note 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. English 3 En Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker Front left speaker Preparation: Check the items In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. Subwoofer Surround right speaker ❏ Indoor FM antenna ❏ AM loop antenna The following items are not included in the package of this unit. Center speaker ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2 ❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1 ❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. DVD player Surround left speaker ❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 8 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En ❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ................................................. 1 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable ................................................ 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1 Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers SPEAKERS ANTENNA OUT DVD COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR DVD DTV/CBL AC OUTLETS Loosen DTV/CBL IN Insert Tighten HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. DVR OUT MONITOR OUT AM S VIDEO PR GND DIGITAL INPUT PB FM R SURROUND L CENTER R FRONT B L R FRONT A L 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 VIDEO AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER L R COAXIAL DVD CENTER R SUBWOOFER 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker Front left speaker Center and surround speakers Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker To the surround left speaker To the center speaker 4 4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack of this unit. 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver OUTPUT IN (PLAY) MD/ OUT CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER Input jack SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Subwoofer cable English 5 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components SPEAKERS ANTENNA OUT DVD COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. AC OUTLETS AV receiver DTV/CBL HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT DVR 2 IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT AM S VIDEO PR GND DIGITAL INPUT PB FM R SURROUND L CENTER R FRONT B L 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 Y COAXIAL DVD player VIDEO AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND DVD CENTER L L R R DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L DVD VIDEO jack Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Composite video output jack 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player Video cable Connect the video cable to the video input jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Video monitor AV receiver AV receiver L/MONO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO-1 IN AUDIO R Y PB PR L/MONO COLOR STREAM HD IN R AUDIO Video input jack Digital coaxial audio output jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio cable 6 En DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Quick start guide 4 ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 12 • Connecting a video monitor ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a DVD player ☞ P. 16 INTRODUCTION Connect the FM and AM antennas to this unit. See page 20 for the details. • Connecting a DVD recorder ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a cable TV or a satellite tuner ☞ P. 16 AM loop antenna • Connecting a CD player and an MD recorder ☞ P. 19 Indoor FM antenna • Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel audio connection ☞ P. 19 • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 20 Open the lever Insert Close the lever • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 20 • Using the USB jack on the front panel ☞ P. 43 y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM and GND terminal. Note The shape of the AM and GND terminals may vary depending on the unit. 5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. y This unit is equipped with AC OUTLETS for the power supply of the other components. See page 21 for details. English 7 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel. 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 5 Rotate 8 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated, and the indicator on the selected SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources. Note Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the back ground music for this room...” Press F SCENE 2 (or E SCENE 2) to select “Disc Listening”. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. 3 Press F SCENE 1. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” Press FSCENE 3 (or E SCENE 3) to select “TV Viewing”. Note To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 16 for details. y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 8 En Quick start guide Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station...” Notes • To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See pages 40 to 42 for tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 28 • Creating your original SCENE templates ☞ P. 31 ■ Using various input sources y • Basic controls of this unit If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 28 for details. • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ■ After using this unit... Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. INTRODUCTION Press F SCENE 4 (or E SCENE 4) to select “Radio Listening”. What do you want to do with this unit? ☞ P. 32 ☞ P. 40 • Using your USB portable device with this unit ☞ P. 43 ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 37 • Using the pure direct mode for the high fidelity sound ☞ P. 34 • Customizing the sound field programs ☞ P. 39 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press 1 STANDBY/ON (or M POWER). See page 21 for details. Note In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (AUTO SETUP) ☞ P. 24 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit ☞ P. 46 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 56 • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 60 ■ Additional features ☞ P. 36 9 En English Automatically turning off this unit Connections Connections Rear panel 2 1 3 4 5 ANTENNA OUT DVD 6 SPEAKERS AC OUTLETS DTV/CBL HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR VIDEO DVD MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT AM S VIDEO PR GND DIGITAL INPUT PB FM R SURROUND L CENTER R FRONT B L R FRONT A L 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y VIDEO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER L 1 R COAXIAL DVD CENTER L R SUBWOOFER 7 8 9 0 1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See page 18 for connection information. 6 AC OUTLETS See page 21 for connection information. 2 HDMI jacks See page 17 for connection information. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16 and 19 for connection information. 3 VIDEO jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 8 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. 4 ANTENNA terminals See page 20 for connection information. 9 AUDIO jacks See pages 16 and 19 for connection information. 5 SPEAKERS terminals See page 12 for connection information. 0 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 12 for connection information. 10 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. FL C FR FR SW 30˚ FL SR PREPARATION C SL SR SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SR 1.8 m (6 ft) Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. English 11 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 21). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. • Use the magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13). Note A speaker cable is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Front speakers (B) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left Center speaker Subwoofer Center speaker ANTENNA OUT DVD COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR DTV/CBL AC OUTLETS HDMI VIDEO DVD MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT AM S VIDEO PR GND DIGITAL INPUT PB FM CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT DVD FRONT SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT R FRONT B L R FRONT A L OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER 1 R R SUBWOOFER Subwoofer 12 En CENTER VIDEO L COAXIAL R SURROUND L 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Right Left Front speakers (A) Connections ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 1 Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 21 for details about turning on or off this unit. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. 10 mm (3/8”) ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. PREPARATION Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Setting the speaker impedance SP IMP.- 8 MIN 4 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. SP IMP.- 6 MIN 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. Note Banana plug The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 13 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs Coaxial digital audio cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug Y (Blue) (Red) PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the optical digital audio cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input COMPONENT VIDEO Output (MONITOR OUT) PR PR PB PB Y Y S VIDEO VIDEO Note The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT (REC) jacks. 14 En Connections Information on HDMI™ Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit, – make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 16). – mute the volume of the connected video monitor. ■ HDMI jack and cable plug PREPARATION You can play back pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source component to this unit using HDMI connections. At that time, audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/CBL). Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. HDMI HDMI cable plug y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. English 15 En Connections Connecting video components Connect the video components as follows. y Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV, and cable TV to this unit using the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO connections (see page 17). ■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD player OUT DVD ■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and a DVD recorder OUT DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT DVD MONITOR OUT S VIDEO PR DTV/CBL DVR VIDEO MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT S VIDEO PR DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL INPUT PB PB OPTICAL OPTICAL VIDEO SURROUND L DVD DTV/CBL 2 IN DVR OUT VIDEO MULTI CH INPUT CD DTV/ CBL FRONT R 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER R V V Video out C Audio out Video in Audio out O L Audio out L V Video out CD L SUBWOOFER Audio out AUDIO CENTER L DVD R SURROUND 2 L 1 COAXIAL Y AUDIO DVD CENTER R V L R L R V Video in DTV/ CBL FRONT 3 CD MULTI CH INPUT Audio in Y Audio out 3 Video out CD DVD player Video monitor 16 En Cable TV or Satellite tuner DVD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections indicates alternative connections Connections ■ Connecting to the HDMI, COMPONENT VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using HDMI, COMPONENT VIDEO or S VIDEO connections. Note Be sure to connect your video components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a HDMI connection, connect your video components to this unit using the HDMI connection. HDMI connection Video monitor Cable TV or satellite tuner PREPARATION Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit, – make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 16). – mute the volume of the connected video monitor. Notes • When you connect your TV monitor or projector via HDMI connection, the OSD does not appear. In such cases, connect the TV monitor or projector via component, S-video or video connection. • Connect the input source components to the HDMI DVD or HDMI DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. • Audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/CBL). • Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. ANTENNA OUT DVD ENT VIDEO DVR DTV/CBL HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT AM S VIDEO GND FM 75 UNBAL. VIDEO CH INPUT SURROUND AUDIO DVD CENTER DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT CD IN MD/ (PLAY) CD-R ( L R SUBWOOFER DVD player English 17 En Connections COMPONENT VIDEO connection S VIDEO connection Video monitor Video monitor Cable TV or satellite tuner Y PB PR Y PB Video in Video out Video in Video out DVD player S PR OUT S DVD DTV/CBL HDMI VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO PR PB VIDEO Y AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER CD L L R R SUBWOOFER 18 En PB PR Cable TV or satellite tuner DVD recorder DVD player Video in Y S S Video out PR Video out PB Video out Y Video out S DVD recorder Connections Connecting audio components Connect the audio components as follows. ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT PB FM R SURROUN 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y VIDEO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD SUB WOOFER L 1 R COAXIAL R SUBWOOFER O L R Audio out L Audio out Audio out CD player R L R Audio in CD recorder or MD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. MULTI CH INPUT DTV/ CBL FRONT SURROUND Notes CENTER 2 L 1 R COAXIAL L R Center out R English Front out L Subwoofer out SUBWOOFER Surround out DVD • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 33), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. Multi-format player or external decoder 19 En Connections Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. Notes To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING l A/B/C/D/E FM/AM h PRESET/TUNING Outdoor AM antenna TUNING AUTO/MAN'L MEMORY SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT STEREO 4 h TONE CONTROL l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO USB R Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) VIDEO AUX VIDEO L V L Video output AUDIO R R ANTENNA Audio output R AM GND FM 75 UNBAL. Game console or video camera IN MD/ O (PLAY) CD-R (R Ground For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 20 En Connections Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Turning on and off the power ■ Turning on this unit Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or M POWER) to turn on this unit. AC OUTLETS y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Power cable Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or N STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. PREPARATION ■ Set this unit to the standby mode ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) Use these outlets to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlets. Power to these outlets is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlets is cut off when this unit is set to the standby mode. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlets, see “Specifications” on page 70. English 21 En Connections Front panel display 1 2 4 3 DVR t 5 V-AUX DTV/CBL 6 VIRTUAL ENHANCER SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB MD/CD-R DVD USB HiFi DSP 7 TUNER 8 CD YPAO AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE q DIGITAL q PL ft q PL mS dB PCM 0 A B C 1 Decoder indicator The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 37). 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 38). 4 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 38). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 6 YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without any modifications (see page 24). 7 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see pages 40). 8 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 36). 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 0 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 22 En D E 9 F VOLUME dB LFE L C R SL SR G A Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 36). B SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected (see page 33). C NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 35). D CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 37). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 37). E Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. F SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 36). G Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SR LFE indicator Input channel indicators LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Connections ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30º PREPARATION 30º Approximately 6 m (20 ft) Y Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 59. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places English 23 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using AUTO SETUP 2 Notes Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. OPTIMIZER MIC • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Y TUNING AUTO/MAN'L VIDEO AUX AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R y You can run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 Optimizer microphone The following display appears in the OSD. AUTO:MENU SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START 3 p Automatic processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start p Make sure of the following check points before starting the AUTO SETUP operations. ❏ Speakers are connected appropriately. ❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit. ❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on. ❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). ❏ The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer is set to the maximum. ❏ FRONT A speakers are selected as the front speaker system (see page 33). ❏ The room is sufficiently quiet. Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.). 24 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room The display changes as follows. 4 Make sure that “SETUP” is set to “AUTO” and the pointer is pointing at “START”. AUTO:MENU y SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO . START You can also select the following setup methods. In this case, press G k to select “SETUP”, press G l / h to select the one of the following choises and then select “START”. PREPARATION Choices: AUTO, RELOAD, UNDO, DEFAULT • Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and override the previous settings. • Select “UNDO” to undo the last “AUTO SETUP” settings and restore the previous settings. • Select “DEFAULT” to reset the “AUTO SETUP” parameters to the initial factory settings. p p Automatic processing of all item [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start AUTO:CHECK INITIALIZING . WIRING/LEVEL DISTANCE SIZE [ WAITING;;; ;;;;;;;;;; []:Exit Note “RELOAD” or “UNDO” is available only when you have previously run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results. 5 Press D AMP and then press G ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. Once all items are set, the “AUTO:RESULT” display appears in the OSD. Notes • During the auto setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • We recommend getting out of the room while this unit is in the auto setup procedure. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete the auto setup procedure. This unit performs the following checks: Speaker wiring/volume level WIRING/LEVEL Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Speaker distance DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. NO WARNING RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB . >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows. Number of speakers SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Front/Back/Subwoofer Speaker distance DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance Speaker level LVL Displays the speaker output level in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “E-6:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing procedure, restart from step 4. • If you selected “RELOAD” in step 4, no test tones are output. • If an error occurs during the “AUTO:CHECK” procedure, the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on page 27. • When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” and the number of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT” (see page 27). English Speaker size SIZE Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. AUTO:RESULT 25 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room 6 Press G ENTER to display the setup results in detail. 7 Press G l / h repeatedly to toggle between the setup result displays. 9 Make sure the pointer is pointing at “SET” and “CANCEL” and then press G l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”. Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP” results. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP” results. 10 Press G ENTER to confirm your selection. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. Results of the speaker connection and wiring Results of the speaker distance from the listening position SET MENU TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO Results of the speaker size If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 46). Note The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your speakers. 8 Press G ENTER to return to the “AUTO:RESULT” display. AUTO:RESULT NO WARNING RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB . >SET CANCEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 26 En p y p Results of the speaker output level [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 11 Press Q MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. 12 Disconnect the optimizer microphone from this unit. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. y If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate your system. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room ■ If an error screen appears Press G k / n / l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and then press G ENTER. The following display is an example where “E-5:USER CANCEL” appears in the OSD. ■ If “WARNING” appears When this unit detects potential problems during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure, “WARNING” appears in the “RESULT:EXIT” display. Check the warning messages to correct your speaker settings. Note AUTO:ERROR . E-5:USER CANCEL Don't operate any function Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. 1 EXIT [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: RETRY, EXIT • Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. • Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Make sure the pointer is pointing at “WARNING” and then press G ENTER to display the detailed information about the warning. The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates the number of warning messages. PREPARATION >RETRY AUTO:RESULT . WARNING(1) RESULT SP : 3/2/0.1 DIST: 3.2/3.5m LVL : -2/+2dB CANCEL >SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 Press Gl / h repeatedly to toggle between the warning displays. WARNING:W-1 <OUT OF PHASE> Reverse Channel -FR CENTER --[p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return y • For details about each warning message, see the “AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 65. • When the corresponding warning message is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed instead. 3 Press G ENTER to return to the top “RESULT:EXIT” display. English 27 En SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 15 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press D INPUT l / h (or press D AMP and then press G l / h) to select the desired template. SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening l INPUT h Front panel If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. or AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template Remote control 1 DVD MovieView Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Press and hold the desired F SCENE (or E SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of the currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds 1 or 1 Front panel Remote control 1 Flashes DVD Viewing 28 En 3 Press the F SCENE (or E SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 Front panel or 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 56 for details. Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE template DVD Viewing Default SCENE buttons 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SACD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Disc HiFi Listening Music Disc Listening CD BASIC OPERATION Disc Listening 2 CD HiFi Listening CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs USB memory device or USB portable audio player TV programs TUNER (FM/AM) USB DTV/CBL Radio Listening 4 USB Audio Listening TV Viewing 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Game Playing y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 31 for details. English 29 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE templates descriptions CD Listening SCENE template Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. Features Input source Playback mode CD 2ch Stereo DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting) CD Music Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on your DVD player. Select this SCENE template when you play back the music source on your CD player as the background music. DVD CD STRAIGHT Radio Listening (SCENE 4 as the default setting) DVD Movie Viewing Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD 5ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. Movie Dramatic TUNER DVD Live Viewing MUSIC ENHANCER 5ch STEREO \ Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on your DVD player. DVD Pop/Rock Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Movie Dramatic Disc HiFi Listening TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs. DTV/CBL Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your DVD player. DVD DIRECT STEREO Music Disc Listening 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on TV. DTV/CBL Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources on your DVD player as the background music. DVD 5ch Stereo CD HiFi Listening Select this SCENE template when you enjoy the high fidelity sound of the music discs on your CD player. CD 30 En DIRECT STEREO TV Sports Game Playing Select this SCENE template when you play video games. V-AUX Disc Listening (SCENE 2 as the default setting) STRAIGHT TV Sports Viewing Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. DVD MUSIC ENHANCER 5ch STEREO USB DVR Viewing DVR USB Audio Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your USB memory device or a USB portable audio player. Game Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 3 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 15 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • INPUT: • MODE: Create the original SCENE template SCENE template library (Image) 4 Press the E SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 BASIC OPERATION The input source component The active sound field programs, STRAIGHT or DIRECT STEREO mode (see pages 34 and 38) • NIGHT: The night listening mode setting (see page 35) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select a SCENE template Press G k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then G l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 1 Assign to the SCENE button y 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press and hold the desired E SCENE button for 3 seconds and then press D AMP. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the video monitor. AMP 1 3 seconds An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding E SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 56 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each E SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The newly created template is only available for the assigned E SCENE button. ■ Renaming the SCENE templates Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the E SCENE button, press G l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template on the menu screen. 31 En English Select “SCENE” in step 3 of “Customizing the preset SCENE templates” and then press G ENTER. • Press G k / n to select the desired character. • Press G l / h to place “_” (underscore) under the space or the desired character. • Press H RETURN to cancel the new name. • Press G ENTER to confirm the new name. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 5 Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then J PROG l / h) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 37 for details about sound field programs. Movie Dramatic Basic operations 1 2 Currently selected surround field program Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input source DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD USB INPUT:DVD Currently selected input source Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 33). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 38). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 35 for details. ■ A quick guide to contents When you want to... 3 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 40 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. Rotate 8 VOLUME (or press R VOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 32 En See page Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 34 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 34 Adjust the parameters of sound field programs 39 Enjoy the sources with a wide dynamic range at night 35 Use headphones 36 Select a decoder to play back sources with 38 Automatically set this unit to the standby mode 36 Playback Additional operations ■ Selecting the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press AMULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 48), you can use the speakers connected to the FRONT B speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). Press 9 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes y Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 54). Notes ■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) ■ Selecting the front speaker set This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch between input jacks when more than one input jack is assigned to the same input source. Use this feature to select the front speaker system (FRONT A or FRONT B). y Press 9 SPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals. The activate front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A BASIC OPERATION • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see page 38). • We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 55). Press E AUDIO SELECT (or B AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired audio input jack select setting. DVR FRONT B V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD USB A.SEL:AUTO Off Audio input jack select setting Note Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting. AUTO ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jacks are assigned to the currently selected input source. English 33 En Playback ■ Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The DIRECT STEREO mode allows sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. ■ Adjusting speaker levels during playback You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. Note Press C DIRECT STEREO (or press D AMP and then press V DIRECT ST.) to select “DIRECT STEREO”. Notes This operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (see page 24) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 50). 1 • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when the DIRECT STEREO mode is selected. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • “TONE CONTROL” (on this page) and “SOUND MENU” (see page 48) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. Display ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Press 0 TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press A PROGRAM l / h (or J PROGl / h) to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. Notes • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. 34 En Press D AMP and then press FLEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker y Once you press F LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing Gk / n. 2 Press Gl / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. y You can press 4 A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output level. Playback ■ Selecting the night listening mode ■ Displaying signal information The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 1 Press D AMP and then press Q MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. SET MENU TOP MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP .A;SIGNAL INFO p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Press D AMP and then press L NIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-oflistening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. Press Gl / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. Press Gn repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press GENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. ;SIGNAL INFO . FORMAT DolbyD SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 3/2/0.1 BITRATE 384kbps FLAG None BASIC OPERATION 2 2 [RETURN]:Exit y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Display Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the DIRECT STEREO mode (see page 34) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the sound field program is selected while you enjoy music contents in a USB memory device etc. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. Description FORMAT Signal format. SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. y The information indicated by the cursor is also displayed in the front panel display. 3 Press Q MENU again to exit from “SET MENU”. English 35 En Playback ■ Playing video sources in the background ■ Muting the audio output You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press O MUTE to mute the audio output. Press O MUTE again to resume the audio output. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. MULTI CH IN CD MD/CD-R DTV/CBL • You can also rotate 8 VOLUME (or press RVOLUME +/–) to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYPE” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 51). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. ■ Using the sleep timer TUNER Audio sources DVD y Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLETS (see page 21). DVR Video sources V-AUX ■ Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Press D AMP and then press PSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press PSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT STEREO h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. EFFECT y • To cancel the sleep timer, press P SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing 1 STANDBY/ON (or N STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 38). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. 36 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then press J PROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. • You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing U ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 33). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode. • The sound field program is canceled when the night listening mode is selected while you enjoy music contents in a USB memory device etc. Sound field program descriptions MUSIC Program Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on threedimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo HiFi DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Music Enh. 2ch Music Enh. 5ch Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER Features BASIC OPERATION Category Note The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from each direction. English 37 En Sound field programs ■ Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. Press D AMP and then press K SUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 49), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see page 37). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases: – When “5ch Stereo” (see page 37) is selected. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 38 En ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 37). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 33). ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Press B STRAIGHT (or press D AMP and then press T STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press B STRAIGHT (or T STRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. Sound field programs ■ Editing sound fields parameters You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 1 While listening to a source, press D AMP and then press Gk / n to select the desired parameter. 2 Press G l / h to change the parameter value. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 55). y Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. BASIC OPERATION For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX For PRO LOGIC II Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch Effect level Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: LOW, HIGH English 39 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO A AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) A If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. y Hold down the button to continue searching. AUTO TUNED A 40 En AM 1530 kHz FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning Manual preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 40 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/ TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes TUNED Flash AUTO C3 : AM Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 630 kHz Preset station number MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz MEMORY BASIC OPERATION 1 4 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. y You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. TUNED C3 : AM 630 kHz The displayed station has been stored as C3. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. English 41 En FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press C TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or G A/B/C/D/E l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Exchanging preset station You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold 2 PRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 2 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY E1 : FM 87.5 MHz Flashes 3 E1 : FM 87.5 MHz y Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Flashes MEMORY A5 : FM 90.7 MHz Flashes 4 42 En Press 2 PRESET/TUNING again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. USING A USB MEMORY DEVICE OR A USB PORTABLE AUDIO PLAYER Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. ■ Supported USB devices This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (except USB hard disk drives) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. Notes • Only the first partition (32 GB or less) is displayed in the OSD. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. Playback operation Follow the procedures below to enjoy the music stored in your USB device or a USB portable audio player. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press C USB) to select USB. The cursor on the left of the USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played is automatically played. Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER BASIC OPERATION ■ Connecting a USB memory device or a USB potable audio player CD USB INPUT:USB Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. VOLUME 2 Press S DISPLAY to display the top USB file list. The USB file list appears in the OSD. OPTIMIZER MIC STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L USB Root Ellis Margellis Frankie Zipper Hall in Call Jackie Pastarius Jmiel Jean-Luc Ponta Jim Hallo SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT STEREO h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT USB > > > > > > > 1/7 y USB memory device or USB portable audio player • “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • When this unit is in the top directory, “Root” appears beside “USB”. English 43 En Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player 3 4 Press G k / n / l / h on the remote control to select the desired file. • Press G k / n to select the desired file/folder. • Press G ENTER or G h to enter the selected folder. • Press G l to return to the previous folder level. ■ The function of the play information display USB Press G ENTER to play the selected file. y • You can use I b / a to skip backward/forward and I h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “USB PLAY STYLE” parameters in “OPTION MENU” (see page 55). • You can select the display mode in the front panel display by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 54). [Play] 1 2 3 . 4 00:00 All FrankieZipper Made-to-orderaaaaaAA ;RoadtoIndiaaaAAAA 5 6 7 .A 1 Name of the artist 2 Name of the album 3 Name of the song 4 Elapsed time Note When the elapsed time exceed “99:59”, “--:--” appeared instead of the time. 5 6 (playback) icon All (all repeat), 1 (single repeat) icons When “REPEAT” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 55) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the top right corner while files or folders are being played. 7 (shuffle) icon When “SHUFFLE” of the “USB PLAY STYLE” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 55) is set to “OFF”, no icon appears in the top right corner while files or holders are being played. 44 En RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the source component you want to record from. 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • TONE CONTROL (see page 34) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 34) and the sound field programs (see page 37) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the USB jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your DVD recorder. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. English 45 En SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 24). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 48 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 50 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 50 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 51 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 51 F)D.RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 51 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 51 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)INPUT ASSIGN Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 52 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 53 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each input source. 53 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 53 E)MULTI CH SET Selects the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 54 46 En SET MENU Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 54 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 55 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 55 D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the factory settings. 55 E)USB PLAY STYLE Adjusts the playback style of a USB source. 55 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 35). Using SET MENU 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y ;MANUAL SETUP You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. . 1 SOUND MENU 2 INPUT MENU 3 OPTION MENU Press D AMP and then press Q MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. 4 Press G k / n / l / h and G ENTER to select and change the parameter. • Press G k / n to select the desired menu or parameter. • Press G l / h to change the parameter value. • Press G ENTER to enter the selected menu or to confirm the parameter. • Press H RETURN to return to the previous menu level. 5 Press Q MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. TOPAMENU . ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2 Press G k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. SET MENU p p SET MENU [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Press G ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. TOPAMENU ;AUTO SETUP .A;MANUAL SETUP ;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter English 47 En SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays. ;MANUAL SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE . F)D.RANGE G)AUDIO SET 1 SOUND MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)SPEAKER SET B)SP LEVEL C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small A)SPEAKER SET FRONT SP ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B SMALL >LARGE When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET FRONT B;;;;FRONT p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Note When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT” (see page 49), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET CENTER SP NONE >SML LRG Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 38). 48 En When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. SET MENU Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUR. L/R SP NONE >SML Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 47 and 48). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 47 and 48). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz LRG 1 SOUND MENU When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 38). LFE Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH A)SPEAKER SET CROSSOVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 1 SOUND MENU A)SPEAKER SET SUBWOOFER PHASE 1 SOUND MENU SWFR FRONT>BOTH >NORMAL REVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET LFE/BASS OUT When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 48). English When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRONT” (front). The LFE signals, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 48). 49 En SET MENU ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 SOUND MENU . ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. B)SP LEVEL 1/2 -__________+ FL FR C 1 SOUND MENU C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONT L;;;10.0ft FRONT R;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;10.0ft Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p SP LEVEL 1/2 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: feet (ft) • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 50 En SET MENU ■ Center speaker equalizer D)CENTER GEQ ■ Dynamic range F)D.RANGE Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. E)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. 1 SOUND MENU G)AUDIO SET . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms MAX VOL.;;;+16dB INI.VOL.;;;;;OFF [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p 1 SOUND MENU Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. p Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust p p p D)CENTER GEQ TEST >OFF ON . 100Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 300Hz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 1kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 3kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB 10kHz ;;;;;; 0.0dB [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Adjust F)D.RANGE . SP D.R;;;;MAX HP D.R;;;;MAX p 1 SOUND MENU 1 SOUND MENU Mute type MUTE TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 36). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Note English Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 49), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 51 En SET MENU Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB. 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the decoder mode or rename the input source. ;MANUAL SETUP Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB 2 INPUT MENU Note Initial volume INI.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: OFF, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting. p The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. p . A)INPUT ASSIGN B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE E)MULTI CH SET [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using D INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (C)). For COAXIAL INPUT jack 1 COAXIAL IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU A)INPUT ASSIGN COAXIAL IN . (1);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) [p]/[[]:Select For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR 2 INPUT MENU A)INPUT ASSIGN OPTICAL IN . (2);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) [p]/[[]:Select Note You cannot select a specific item more than once. 52 En SET MENU ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. 2 INPUT MENU B)INPUT RENAME DVD -> DVD p 1 p [p]/[[]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Chara. Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or A MULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the output volume of each source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, USB, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB 2 INPUT MENU C)VOLUME TRIM DVD DVD ;;;;;;0.0dB MULTI CH IN [p]/[[]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE USB 2 INPUT MENU D)DECODER MODE 2 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press G ENTER to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST ADVANCED OPERATION Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press G n to change the character in the following order, or press G k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) LAST ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO ;;;;AUTO p Press G k / n to select the character you want to use and then press G l / h to move to the next space. >AUTO CD DVD DTV/CBL p 3 Press D AMP and then press G l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. . • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. English 53 En SET MENU ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET 2 INPUT MENU E)MULTI CH SET BGV;;;;;;;;;LAST [p]/[[]:Select Background Video BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, LAST y Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. ;MANUAL SETUP 3 OPTION MENU p p . A)DISPLAY SET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)PARAM. INI E)USB PLAY STYLE [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET 3 OPTION MENU A)DISPLAY SET p p . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 FL SCROLL;;;CONT OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 OSD-SOURCE;;;30s OSD-AMP;;;;;;30s [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press G l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press G h to make the front panel display brighter. 54 En Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as a song title or a channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “USB” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press G l to raise the position of the OSD. • Press G h to lower the position of the OSD. Source feature OSD display time OSD-SOURCE Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the USB file list and the play information in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD continuously during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. Amplifier function OSD display time OSD-AMP Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the status and sound field parameters information screen after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD constantly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. SET MENU ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES 3 OPTION MENU 3 OPTION MENU B)MEMORY >OFF D)PARAM. INI GUARD >NO ON [p]/[[]:Select [ENTER]:Return [p]/[[]:Select • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ■ Audio select 3 OPTION MENU C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”. ■ USB playback styles E)USB PLAY STYLE Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle files in a random order or repeat one specific file or a sequence of files. 3 OPTION MENU E)USB PLAY STYLE . REPEAT.......OFF SHUFFLE......OFF [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [p]/[[]:Select p • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 33). Notes p [p]/[[]:Select • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu screen. • Select “YES” and then press G ENTER to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. ADVANCED OPERATION C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST YES Repeat REPEAT Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one file or a sequence of files. Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one file. • Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of files. Shuffle SHUFFLE Use this feature to set this unit to play files or folders in a random order. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “ON” to set this unit to play files or folders in a random order. English 55 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 59). Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 59). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired E SCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX * TV CH DVR USB AMP TV INPUT 1 2 TV VOL TV MUTE SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 SCENE buttons VOLUME MENU ENTER DISPLAY RETURN REC FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START l PROG h ENHANCER STRAIGHT 1 2 3 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT Note * These buttons control the input source component. See page 58 for details of the function of each button. 56 En Press and hold the E SCENE button and the desired input selector button (C) for 3 seconds. y Press the E SCENE button again to operate the input source component. Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press D AMP to control this unit. Press C DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL (see page 59). POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR POWER V-AUX AMP USB TV INPUT AMP TV CH TV VOL TV MUTE *1 DTV/CBL SCENE 1 2 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX TV CH DVR *1 USB AMP TV INPUT 1 2 TV VOL TV MUTE VOLUME MENU SCENE 3 4 ENTER BAND LEVEL TITLE VOLUME MENU DISPLAY RETURN ENTER *2 REC DISPLAY RETURN FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START l PROG h ENHANCER STRAIGHT 1 2 3 SUR.DECODE NIGHT *2 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 REC FREQ/TEXT EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START l PROG h ENHANCER STRAIGHT 1 2 ENT 3 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when D AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press C DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 58. English 57 En Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 59). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX AMP y 4 5 USB TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 DVD player/ recorder VCR Digital TV/ LD player Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 TITLE Title VOLUME MENU 8 DISPLAY RETURN REC EON MODE – PTY SEEK – START l PROG h ENHANCER STRAIGHT 1 2 3 4 DIRECT ST. SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 Tuner 8 9 ENT USB Band PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down (A-E) Previous menu A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up (A-E) Subsequent menu ENTER Enter Enter Subsequent menu RETURN Return Return Previous menu REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec Rec (recorder) Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 e Pause Pause *2 b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Pause Disc skip Rec Play Play Play Search backward Search backward Search backward Pause Pause Play Pause s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop 6 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 7 8 9 MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Skip backward Skip forward Stop Preset stations (1-8) Menu Display Notes *1 *2 7 ENTER FREQ/TEXT Remote control Power *1 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 TV VOL SCENE The remote control has 10 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 10 different components. 1 2 3 TV CH 2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 59). 58 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000 DTV/CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007 V-AUX – – – USB USB YAMAHA 5012 DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011 – – – POWER AV Default code V-AUX USB While holding down 2 Press for 3 seconds Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (W) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. ADVANCED OPERATION Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. English 59 En Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only 1 STANDBY/ON and B STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level Front (A or B) 8Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 1 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 6Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround 3 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 4 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 67). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 60 En • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-20 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with D INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with 9 SPEAKERS on the front panel. 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press O MUTE or R VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 36 — 13 33 32, 33 Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals. Make an analog or digital connection beside the HDMI connection. — The setting of the connected component is improper. Make an appropriate setting following the instruction manual of the connected component. — — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. English 61 En Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause See page Check that the impedance setting is correct. 13 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press O MUTE or R VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 36 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-20 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. This is not malfunction. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 5ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press B STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. The source does not contain lowfrequency bass signals. This is not malfunction. No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. 62 En The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy 34 — 48 37 49 38 49 49 — Troubleshooting Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. This is not malfunction. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This is not malfunction. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. See page — 33 — 52 — — 16, 19 Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 55 — — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 12 — — English 63 En Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 20 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noise can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. — — 40 41 — ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Connect MIC! Unplug HP! 64 En Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Headphones are connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 24 Unplug the headphones. — Troubleshooting During AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 12 E-2:NO SUR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 12 E-3:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 24 E-5:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-6:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. E-4:NO MIC 24 24 After AUTO SETUP Warning message W-1:OUT OF PHASE W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) W-3:LEVEL ERROR Cause Remedy See page Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). The distance between the nearest speaker and the furthest speaker is out of adjustable range. Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) If “SWFR:TOO LOUD” or “SWFR:TOO LOW” appears, adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 24 Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — Check the speaker connections. 12 Use speakers of similar quality. — 12 — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes • • • • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again. If a warning message “W-1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If a warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, no corrections are made. If an error message “E-6” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified Yamaha service center. English 65 En Troubleshooting ■ USB Cause The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device (except USB hard disk drives) or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 43 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 21 “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. Status message Cause Disconnected Access error Unable to play 66 En Remedy See page Problem — — Turn this unit off then on again. 21 Remedy See page Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 43 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 43 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — No varied data is detected. — Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Remedy See page The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 23 Cause Wrong distance or angle. Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 59 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 59 — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 4 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press 1 STANDBY/ON. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. English 67 En Glossary Glossary ■ Audio information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. 68 En DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. Glossary ■ Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Video information Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ MP3 One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. English 69 En Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 100 W • Video Signal Type (Gray back) .............................................. NTSC • Maximum Power for Front, Center, Surround (JEITA) 1kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 135 W • Dynamic Power (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................. 110/130/160/180 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. Effect On, 1 kHz, 0.5% THD .................... 2.0 V or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more • Maximum Input Level ........................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range ..................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz • Total Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz, 50 W, Front L/R, 8 Ω ) ................................ 0.06% or less • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (200 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz GENERAL • Phones Output .......................................................... 400 mV/470 Ω • Power Consumption .................................................. 240 W/320 VA • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.8 W or less • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ........................................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (FRONT SP, CENTER SP, SUR. L/R SP: SMALL/SML) ......................................................................................12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. 70 En • Power Supply ........................................................ 120 V AC, 60 Hz • AC Outlets ............................................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”) • Weight .............................................................. 8.1 kg (17 lbs 14 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Index ■ Numerics ■ ■ ■ A A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 54 A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT, Input menu ....................................... 52 A)SPEAKER SET, Sound menu ......... 48 A.DELAY, Audio settings ................... 51 AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) ............. 21 AC OUTLETS, Rear panel .................. 10 AM antenna, Connection ..................... 20 AM tuning ............................................ 40 Amplifier function OSD display time, Display settings ................................ 54 Audio components, Connection ........... 19 Audio delay, Audio settings ................. 51 AUDIO jacks ....................................... 14 Audio jacks .......................................... 14 AUDIO jacks, Rear panel .................... 10 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 33 Audio select, Option menu .................. 55 Audio settings, Sound menu ................ 51 AUTO SETUP ..................................... 24 AUTO SETUP, Error message ............ 64 AUTO: RESULT display, Auto setup ........................................ 26 Automatic preset tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................. 41 Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning ....... 40 ■ B C D D)CENTER GEQ, Sound menu ...........51 D)DECODER MODE, Input menu ......53 D)PARAM. INI, Option menu .............55 Decoder mode, Input menu ..................53 Decoder select mode, Decoder mode ..................................53 Default setting, Remote control code ........................59 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ...14 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks .....14 DIGITAL INPUT jacks, Rear panel ....10 ■ E E)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu .............. 51 E)MULTI CH SET, Input menu .......... 54 E-1:NO FRONT SP, Auto setup error message ................ 65 E-2:NO SURR.SP, Auto setup error message ................ 65 E-3:NOISY, Auto setup error message ................ 65 E-4:NO MIC, Auto setup error message ................ 65 E-5:USER CANCEL, Auto setup error message ................ 65 E-6:INTERNAL ERROR, Auto setup error message ................ 65 Effect level, Sound field parameter ..... 39 ENHANCER indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 Exchange, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................ 42 ■ F F)D. RANGE, Sound menu ................. 51 Factory presets, Advanced setup ......... 60 FL SCROLL, Display settings ............ 54 FLAG, Input source information ......... 35 FM antenna, Connection ..................... 20 FM tuning ............................................ 40 FORMAT, Input source information ... 35 FRONT B speaker setting, Speaker settings ............................... 48 FRONT B, Speaker settings ................ 48 Front panel display .............................. 22 Front panel display scroll, Display settings ............................... 54 FRONT SP, Speaker settings .............. 48 Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 48 71 En English C)AUDIO SELECT, Option menu ...... 55 C)SP DISTANCE, Sound menu .......... 50 C)VOLUME TRIM, Input menu ......... 53 Cable TV, Connection ......................... 16 CD player, Connection ........................ 19 CD recorder, Connection ..................... 19 CENTER SP, Speaker settings ............ 48 Center speaker equalizer, Sound menu ..................................... 51 Center speaker, Speaker settings ......... 48 DIMENSION, Sound field parameter ..................... 39 Dimension, Sound field parameter ...... 39 DIMMER, Display settings ................. 54 Dimmer, Display settings .................... 54 DIRECT STEREO ............................... 34 Direct Stereo ........................................ 34 Display settings, Option menu ............ 54 Display, Input source information ....... 35 DIST .................................................... 25 DIST, Auto setup result ....................... 25 DISTANCE ......................................... 25 DISTANCE, Auto setup ...................... 25 DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ..................... 39 DSP level, Sound field parameter ....... 39 DTS decoder prioritize setting, Decoder mode ................................. 53 DVD player, Connection ..................... 16 DVD recorder, Connection .................. 16 Dynamic range, Sound menu .............. 51 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION B)INPUT RENAME, Input menu ....... 53 B)MEMORY GUARD, Option menu .................................... 55 B)SPEAKER LEVEL, Sound menu ..................................... 50 Background Video, Multi channel input setup ................ 54 BGV, Multi channel input setup .......... 54 BITRATE, Input source information ................. 35 Center width, Sound field parameter ......................39 CHANNEL, Input source information ..................35 CINEMA DSP indicator, Front panel display ...........................22 COAXIAL IN (1), Input assignment ..............................52 COAXIAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ..............................52 COAXIAL INPUT jacks ......................52 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............14 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, Connection .......................................18 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, Rear panel ........................................10 Connect MIC!, Auto setup error message .................64 Connecting to the HDMI ......................17 Connection, AM antenna .....................20 Connection, Audio components ...........19 Connection, Cable TV ..........................16 Connection, CD player .........................19 Connection, CD recorder .....................19 Connection, COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........18 Connection, DVD player ......................16 Connection, DVD recorder ..................16 Connection, FM antenna ......................20 Connection, MD recorder .....................19 Connection, MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................19 Connection, Power cable ......................21 Connection, S VIDEO jacks ................18 Connection, Satellite tuner ...................16 Connection, Speaker ............................12 Connection, Video components ...........16 Connection, Video monitor ..................16 Controlling a TV, Remote control .......57 Controlling other components, Remote control .................................58 Controlling this unit, Remote control .................................57 Creating original SCENE templates .....31 CROSSOVER, Speaker settings ..........49 Crossover, Speaker settings .................49 CT WIDTH, Sound field parameter .....39 1 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 46 2 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 46 2ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 37 3 OPTION MENU ............................... 54 3 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 47 5ch Stereo, Sound field program ......... 37 ■ G G)AUDIO SET, Sound menu .............. 51 Game .................................................... 37 ■ H Hall ....................................................... 37 HDMI ................................................... 15 HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ............. 15 HDMI jacks, Rear panel ...................... 10 Headphone, Dynamic range ................. 51 HEADPHONE, Low-frequency effect level .............. 51 Headphone, Low-frequency effect level .............. 51 Headphones indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 Headphones, use .................................. 36 HiFi DSP indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 HP, Dynamic range .............................. 51 ■ I Infrared window, Remote control ........ 23 INI.VOL., Audio settings .................... 52 Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 52 Input assignment, Input menu .............. 52 Input channel and speaker indicators, Front panel display .......................... 22 Input channel indicators, Front panel display .......................... 22 Input menu, Manual setup ................... 46 Input rename, Input menu .................... 53 Input source indicators, Front panel display .......................... 22 Input source information display ......... 35 ■ J Jazz ....................................................... 37 ■ L LFE indicator, Front panel display ...... 22 LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ...... 49 LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ........... 49 Low-frequency effect level, Sound menu 51 LVL ...................................................... 25 LVL, Auto setup result ........................ 25 ■ M Manual preset tuning, FM/AM tuning ................................. 41 MANUAL SETUP, SET MENU ......... 46 Manual setup, SET MENU .................. 46 Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ........... 40 MAX VOL., Audio settings ................. 52 Maximum volume, Audio settings ....... 52 MD recorder, Connection .................... 19 Memory guard, Option menu ............... 55 Movie Dramatic ................................... 37 Movie Spacious .................................... 37 MULTI CH INPUT jacks, Connection ....................................... 19 MULTI CH INPUT jacks, Rear panel ........................................ 10 72 En Multi channel input setup, Input menu .......................................54 Multi-channel source with headphones ..............................38 Multi-information display, Front panel display ...........................22 Music Enh. 2ch, Sound field program ........................37 Music Enh. 5ch, Sound field program ........................37 MUTE indicator, Front panel display ...........................22 MUTE TYPE, Audio settings ..............51 Muting ..................................................36 ■ N NIGHT indicator, Front panel display ...........................22 Night listening mode ............................35 Number of speakers .............................25 Number of speakers, Auto setup result ..............................25 ■ O OPTICAL IN (2) ..................................52 OPTICAL IN (2), Input assignment ....52 OPTICAL IN (3), Input assignment ....52 OPTICAL INPUT assignment, Input assignment ..............................52 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, Auto setup .....24 Optimizer microphone .........................24 Optimizer microphone, Auto setup ......24 Optimizing speaker setting ...................24 Option menu, Manual setup .................47 OSD SHIFT, Display settings ..............54 OSD shift, Display settings ..................54 OSD-AMP, Display settings ................54 OSD-SOURCE, Display settings .........54 Other components controlling by remote control .............................58 Other components controlling, Remote control .................................58 ■ P PANORAMA, Sound field parameter ......................39 Panorama, Sound field parameter ........39 Parameter initialization, Option menu ....................................55 PCM indicator, Front panel display .....22 PHONES jack ......................................36 Play information display, USB controlling ...............................44 Playing video sources in the background .............................36 PLII Game ............................................38 PLII Movie ...........................................38 PLII Music ...........................................38 Pop/Rock ..............................................37 Power cable, Connection ......................21 Preset station exchange, FM/AM tuning .................................42 Preset station selection, FM/AM tuning .................................42 PRESET, Advanced setup ................... 60 Pro Logic ............................................. 38 Pure hi-fi stereo sound ......................... 34 ■ R Remote control code default setting .... 59 Remote control code setting ................ 59 Remote control codes ........................... iii Remote control codes setting .............. 59 Remote control, Troubleshooting ........ 67 Rename, SCENE template .................. 31 Resetting the system ............................ 67 ■ S S VIDEO jacks .................................... 14 S VIDEO jacks, Connection ................ 18 SAMPLING, Input source information ................. 35 Satellite tuner, Connection .................. 16 SCENE 1 ............................................... 8 SCENE 2 ............................................... 8 SCENE 3 ............................................... 8 SCENE 4 ............................................... 9 SCENE template selection .................. 28 Selection, Audio input jack ................. 33 Selection, Preset station, FM/AM tuning ................................ 42 Selection, SCENE template ................. 28 SET MENU ......................................... 46 Setting remote control code ................. 59 Setting SCENE template input source, Remote control ................................ 56 Setting the speaker impedance ............ 13 SIGNAL INFO, SET MENU .............. 35 SILENT CINEMA .............................. 38 SILENT CINEMA indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 SIZE ..................................................... 25 SIZE, Auto setup ................................. 25 SLEEP indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 Sleep timer ........................................... 36 Sound field programs with headphones .............................. 38 Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 46 Source feature OSD display time, Display settings ............................... 54 SP ......................................................... 25 SP A B indicators, Front panel display .......................... 22 SP IMP., Advanced setup .................... 60 SP, Auto setup result ........................... 25 SP, Dynamic range .............................. 51 Speaker distance .................................. 25 Speaker distance, Auto setup ............... 25 Speaker distance, Auto setup result ..... 25 Speaker distance, Sound menu ............ 50 Speaker distances, Speaker distance .............................. 50 Speaker impedance, Advanced setup ............................... 60 Speaker level ....................................... 25 Speaker level adjustment ..................... 34 Speaker level, Auto setup result .......... 25 Speaker level, Sound menu .................. 50 Speaker settings, Sound menu ............. 48 Speaker size ......................................... 25 Speaker size, Auto setup ...................... 25 Speaker wiring ..................................... 25 Speaker wiring, Auto setup .................. 25 Speaker wiring/volume level, Auto setup ........................................ 25 Speaker, Connection ............................ 12 Speaker, Dynamic range ...................... 51 SPEAKER, Low-frequency effect level .............. 51 Speaker, Low-frequency effect level .............. 51 SPEAKERS terminals, Rear panel ...... 10 Specifications ....................................... 70 STRAIGHT .......................................... 38 Straight ................................................. 38 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack, Rear panel ........................................ 10 SUBWOOFER PHASE, Speaker settings ............................... 49 Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 49 Supplied accessories .............................. 3 SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 49 Surround left/right speakers, Speaker settings ............................... 49 ■ VOLUME level indicator, Front panel display ...........................22 Volume Trim, Input menu ....................53 ■ W W-1:OUT OF PHASE, Auto setup error message .................65 W-2:DISTANCE ERROR, Auto setup error message .................65 W-3:LEVEL ERROR, Auto setup error message .................65 WIRING/LEVEL .................................25 WIRING/LEVEL, Auto setup ..............25 ■ Y Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer .........................................24 YPAO ...................................................24 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) .........................24 YPAO indicator, Front panel display ...........................22 ■ Z Zone B ..................................................33 T ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Test tone, Center speaker equalizer ..... 51 TEST, Center speaker equalizer .......... 51 Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 34 Troubleshooting ................................... 61 Tuner (FM/AM), Troubleshooting ...... 64 Tuner indicators, Front panel display .......................... 22 Turning off the power .......................... 21 Turning on the power ........................... 21 TV controlling by remote control ........ 57 TV controlling, Remote control ........... 57 TV Sports ............................................. 37 U UNIT, Speaker distance ....................... 50 Unit, Speaker distance ......................... 50 Unplug HP!, Auto setup error message ................ 64 USB memory device using, USB portable audio player using ..... 43 USB playback operation ...................... 43 USB playback styles ............................ 55 USB, Troubleshooting ......................... 66 ■ V English VIDEO AUX jacks, Front panel .......... 20 Video components, Connection ........... 16 VIDEO jacks ........................................ 14 Video jacks .......................................... 14 VIDEO jacks, Rear panel ..................... 10 Video monitor, Connection .................. 16 Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 38 VIRTUAL indicator, Front panel display .......................... 22 73 En Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 4 l STRAIGHT INPUT DIRECT STEREO VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 9 i 2 h 0 A B C D E F VIDEO L AUDIO USB R Remote control Y A B POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR M N O P TV CH C V-AUX USB AMP TV INPUT 1 2 TV VOL TV MUTE D E F SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE G 3 4 VOLUME MENU R ENTER H S DISPLAY RETURN Q REC I FREQ/TEXT J l PROG h 1 2 MODE – PTY SEEK – START ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 8 T U ENT V 4 DIRECT ST. SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 APPENDIX K L EON W X ii List of remote control codes TV ACER ACME ACURA ADA ADC ADMIRAL ADYSON AGASHI AGAZI AGB AIKO AIWA AKAI AKIBA AKURA ALARON ALBA ALBIRAL ALLSTAR AMPLIVISION 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 0209, 0218 0206, 0209, 0218 0200 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 0212 0213 0207 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 AMTRON 0062 ANAM 0208 ANAM NATIONAL 0062 ANGLO 0208 ANITECH 0206, 0208 ANSONIC 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 APEX 0118, 0122, 0132 ARC EN CIEL 0216 ARCAM 0200 ARCAM DELTA 0207 ARISTONA 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 ASBERG 0213 ASTRA 0208 ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ATORI 0208 AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AUDIOTON 0207 AUDIOVOX 0062 AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207 AWA 0200 BAIRD 0216 BANG & OLUFSEN 0205 BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 BASTIDE 0207 BAUR 0217 BEKO 0228 BELCOR 0060 AMSTRAD iii BELL & HOWELL 0058, 0064 BENQ 0051, 0081 BEON 0213, 0217 BESTAR 0213 BINATONE 0207 BLACK STAR 0214 BLAUPUNKT 0255 BLUE SKY 0209, 0218 BONDSTEC 0214 BOOTS 0207 BRADFORD 0062 BRANDT 0216, 0226 BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217 BRITANNIA 0200, 0207 BROCKWOOD 0060 BROKSONIC 0138 BRUNS 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 CANDLE 0060, 0061 CAPSONIC 0206 CASCADE 0208 CATHAY 0213, 0217 CCE 0127 CELEBRITY 0059 CENTURION 0213, 0217 CENTURY 0205 CGE 0214, 0215 CIMLINE 0208, 0218 CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 CITY 0208 CLARIVOX 0212, 0217 CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 COLORTYME 0060, 0061 CONCERTO 0060, 0061 CONCORDE 0208 CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213 CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208 CONTEC/CONY 0062 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0216 COSMEL 0208 CRAIG 0062 CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215 CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS ELECTRONICS 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 CYBERTRON 0209, 0218 DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 DAINICHI 0200, 0209, 0218 DANSAI 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 DANTAX DAYTRON DE GRAAF DECCA 0217 0060, 0061, 0208 0210 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 DESMET 0213, 0217 DIAMOND 0200 DIMENSIA 0057 DIXI 0208, 0213, 0217 DTS 0208 DUAL 0207, 0215, 0216 DUAL-TEC 0207, 0208, 0215 DUMONT 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 DURABRAND 0126 DUX 0217 DYNATRON 0213, 0217 ELBE 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 ELBE-SHARP 0204 ELCIT 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 ELECTROBAND 0059 ELECTROHOME 0059, 0060, 0061 ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218 ELMAN 0215 ELTA 0200, 0208 EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 ENVISION 0060, 0061 ERRES 0213, 0217 ESA 0080 ETRON 0208 EURO-FEEL 0206 EUROLINE 0217 EUROMAN 0200 EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213 EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 FENNER 0208 FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226 FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210 FINLANDIA 0210 FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 FLINT 0213, 0218 FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0200 FORTRESS 0205 FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 FUTURETECH 0062 GATEWAY 0094 GBC 0208, 0215, 0218 GE 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215 GENERAL TECHNIC 0208 GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 GIBRALTER 0060 GOLDHAND 0200 GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 GRAETZ 0211 GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217 GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 GRUNPY 0062 HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207 HALLMARK 0060, 0061 HAMPTON 0200, 0207 HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 HANTAREX 0204, 0208 HARVARD 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 HIFIVOX 0216 HIGASHI 0200 HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 HISAWA 0209, 0218 HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 HORNYPHON 0213 HOSHAI 0209, 0218 HUANYU 0200, 0207 HYGASHI 0200, 0207 HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICES 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 INDIANA 0213, 0217 INFINITY 0063 INGELEN 0211 INGERSOL 0208 INNO HIT 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 INNOVATION 0206, 0208 INTERBUY 0208, 0214 INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 MARELLI 0205 MARK 0200, 0213, 0217 MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 MEDIATOR 0213, 0217 MEDION 0206, 0208 MEGATRON 0061 MELECTRONIC 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 MEMPHIS 0208 METZ 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 MICROMAXX 0206, 0208 MICROSTAR 0206, 0208 MINERVA 0204 MINOKA 0213 MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 MONTGOMERY WARD 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 MULTI SYSTEM 0217 MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 MURPHY 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 NAONIS 0210 NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 NECKERMANN 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 NESCO 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 NEW TECH 0208, 0213 NEW WORLD 0209, 0218 NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207 NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 NIKKO 0061 NOBLIKO 0200, 0207 NOGAMATIC 0216 NOKIA 0129, 0211 NORDMENDE 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 NORDVISION 0217 OCEANIC 0211 OLEVIA 0052, 0084 ONCEAS 0207 ONWA 0062, 0218 ORBIT 0213 ORION 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 ORLINE 0218 ORSOWE 0204 OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 OSIO 0201 OSO 0209, 0218 OSUME 0218 OTTO VERSAND 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 PAEL 0200, 0207 PALLADIUM 0207 PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 PATHE CINEMA 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 PATHE MARCONI 0212, 0216 PAUSA 0208 PERDIO 0200 PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 PHILHARMONIC 0207 PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 0124 PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PILOT 0060 PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 PLANTRON 0206, 0213 POLAROID 0075 POPPY 0208 PORTLAND 0060, 0061 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0204, 0210 PRECISION 0207 PRIMA 0208, 0211 PROFEX 0208 PROFI-TRONIC 0213 PROLINE 0213 PROSCAN 0057 PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217 PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 PROTON 0060, 0061 PROVIEW 0050 PROVISION 0217 PULSAR 0060 PYE 0213, 0217 PYMI 0208 QUASAR 0152, 0214 QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 RADIALVA 0218 RADIO SHACK 0064 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 RADIOLA 0213, 0217 RADIOMARELLI 0204, 0205, 0214 RADIOTONE 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 REALISTIC 0064 REVOX 0213, 0217 REX 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 RHAPSODY 0200 R-LINE 0213, 0217 ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 ROBOTRON 0205 ROWA 0200 RTF 0205 SABA 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 SACCS 0212 SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 SAMBERS 0204 SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 SANDRA 0200, 0207 SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213 SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 SCOTCH 0061 SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062 SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0211 SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215 SENCORA 0208 SENTRA 0218 SERINO 0200 iv APPENDIX INTERNATIONAL 0200 INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218 IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 ISUKAI 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 JENSEN 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 KAMOSONIC 0207 KAMP 0200, 0207 KAPSCH 0211 KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 KENDO 0128, 0210 KENNEDY 0215 KENWOOD 0060, 0061 KINGSLEY 0200, 0207 KLOSS NOVABEAM 0062 KNEISSEL 0203 KOLSTER 0213 KONKA 0209, 0218 KORPEL 0213, 0217 KORTING 0205 KOYODA 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 KYOTO 0200, 0212 LENCO 0208 LENOIR 0207, 0208 LESA 0214 LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217 LG 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 LIESENK 0217 LIFE 0206, 0208 LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218 LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217 LOGIK 0058 LUMA 0210, 0217 LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217 LUX MAY 0213 LUXMAN 0060, 0061 LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 MAG 0050 MAGNADYNE 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207 MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 MAGNUM 0206, 0208 MAJESTIC 0058 MANDOR 0206 SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 SHOGUN 0060 SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215 SICATEL 0212 SIEMENS 0255 SIERRA 0213 SIGNATURE 0058 SILVA 0200 SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215 SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 SKANTIC 0211 SOLAVOX 0211 SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 SONOLOR 0211 SONTEC 0213, 0217 SONY 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 SOUND & VISION 0209, 0218 SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062 SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 STARLIGHT 0217 STARLITE 0062 STENWAY 0218 STERN 0210, 0211 SUNKAI 0208, 0218 SUNWOOD 0208, 0213 SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207 SUPERTECH 0200 SUPRA 0208 SUPREME 0059 SUSUMU 0209 SUTRON 0208 SYDNEY 0200, 0207 SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080 SYSLINE 0217 SYTONG 0200 TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210 TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 TEAC 0127 TEC 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 TECHWOOD 0060, 0061 TEKNIKA 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 TELEAVIA 0216 TELECOR 0218 TELEFUNKEN 0065, 0213, 0216 TELEGAZI 0218 TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217 TELETON 0207 TELEVIDEON 0200 TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 TESMET 0213 TEVION 0206, 0208 v TEXET THOMSON 0200, 0207 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 THORN 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 TOKAI 0213 TOKYO 0200, 0207 TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 TOWADA 0211, 0215 TRANSTEC 0200 TRIDENT 0204 TRISTAR 0218 TRIUMPH 0204 UHER 0211, 0213 ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 UNITED 0217 UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 UNIVOX 0212 VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 VEXA 0208, 0217 VICTOR 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 VIDEOLOGIQUE 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 VIDEOSAT 0214 VIDEOSYSTEM 0213 VIDEOTECHNIC 0200 VIDTECH 0060, 0061 VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 VISIOLA 0200, 0207 VISION 0213 VORTEC 0213, 0217 VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 WALTHAM 0207, 0212 WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218 WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 WEGA 0205 WELTBLICK 0213, 0217 WESTON 0215 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0008, 0200, 0207, 0217 WINCOM 0055, 0056 YAMAHA 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0005, 0060, 0061 YAMISHI 0218 YOKO 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 YORX 0209, 0218 ZANUSSI 0210 ZENITH 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD COMBO AIWA 0139, 2055 APEX 0132, 2049 BROKSONIC 0138, 2060 BUSH 0230, 2112 JVC 0136, 2053 PANASONIC 0137, 2054, 0254, 2110 RCA 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 SYLVANIA 0134, 2052 THOMSON 0226, 2109 TOSHIBA 0131, 2048, 0231, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR COMBO PANASONIC SAMSUNG SHARP SYLVANIA TOSHIBA 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR COMBO AIWA BUSH DAEWOO 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 GE 0147, 1030 GOODMANS 0240, 1069 GRUNDIG 0236, 1062 HITACHI 0156, 1039 JVC 0153, 1036 MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033 ORION 0235, 1065 PANASONIC 0151, 1034 PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 QUASAR 0152, 1035 RCA 0149, 1032 ROADSTAR 0237, 1066 SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 SHARP 0145, 1028 SONY 0234, 1064 SYLVANIA 0148, 1031 TATUNG 0237, 1066 TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 ZENITH 0154, 1037 DVD/VCR COMBO JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TOSHIBA ZENITH 1017, 1017, 2045, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025, 2046 1022, 2042 1021, 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 VCR ADMIRAL 1008, 1013 ADVENTURA 1005 AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 AKAI 1007, 1043 AKIBA 1050 AKURA 1043, 1050 ALBA 1044, 1050 AMERICAN HIGH 1004 AMSTRAD 1042 ANITECH 1050 ASA 1045, 1046 ASHA 1002, 1014 ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 AUDIO DYNAMICS 1000 AUDIOVOX 1003 BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047 BASIC LINE 1044, 1050 BAUR 1046 BEAUMARK 1002, 1014 BELL & HOWELL 1001 BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048 BROKSONIC 1012, 1013 BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066 CALIX 1003 CANDLE 1002, 1003 CANON 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 CIMLINE 1044, 1050 CITIZEN 1002, 1003 COLORTYME 1000 COLT 1006 CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 CROWN 1050 CURTIS MATHES 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 CYBERNEX 1002, 1014 DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 DANSAI 1050 DANTAX 1044 DBX 1000 DE GRAAF 1046, 1049 DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046 DENON 1010 DIMENSIA 1009 DUAL 1043, 1046 DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 DYNATECH 1005 ELECTROHOME 1003 ELECTROPHONIC 1003 ELTA 1050 EMERSON 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 ETZUKO 1050 FERGUSON 1043 FIDELITY 1042 FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049 FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 FISHER 1001, 1047 FLINT 1044 FORMENTI/PHOENIX 1046 FUJI 1004 FUJITSU 1042 FUNAI 1005, 1042 GALAXY 1042 GARRARD 1005 GBC 1050 GE MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 MARTA 1003 MATSUI 1044, 1045 MATSUSHITA 1004 MEDIATOR 1046 MEDION 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 MEMPHIS 1050 METZ 1048 MGA 1014 MGN TECHNOLOGY 1002, 1014 MICROMAXX 1044, 1048 MICROSTAR 1044, 1048 MIGROS 1042 MINOLTA 1010 MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046 MONTGOMERY WARD 1008 MOTOROLA 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 MURPHY 1042 NATIONAL 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 NECKERMANN 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 NESCO 1050 NIKKO 1003 NOBLEX 1002, 1014 NOKIA 1043, 1047 NORDMENDE 1043 OCEANIC 1042, 1043 OKANO 1044 OLYMPUS 1004 OPTIMUS 1003, 1008 ORION 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 ORSON 1042 OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050 OTTO VERSAND 1046 PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050 PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 PATHE MARCONI 1043 PENNEY 1010, 1014 PENTAX 1010, 1049 PERDIO 1042 PHILCO 1004, 1051 PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 1018 PHONOLA 1046 PILOT 1003 PIONEER 1011, 1046 PRINZ 1042 PROFEX 1050 PROFITRONIC 1014 PROLINE 1042 PROSCAN 1009 PROSONIC 1044 PROTEC 1006 PYE 1046, 1056 QUARTER 1001 QUARTZ 1001, 1047 QUASAR 1004, 1035 QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047 RADIO SHACK 1003 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 RADIOLA 1046 RADIX 1003 RANDEX 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 REX 1043 RFT 1046 ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066 SABA 1043 SAISHO 1044, 1050 SALORA 1047 SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 SANKY 1008 SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 SCHAUB LORENZ 1042, 1043, 1047 SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 SCOTT 1012 SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-SINUDYNE 1046 SELECO 1043 SENTRON 1050 SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050 SHIVAKI 1045 SHOGUN 1002, 1014 SIEMENS 1045, 1047 SIGNATURE 2000 1008 SILVA 1045 SINGER 1004, 1006 SINUDYNE 1046 SONTEC 1045 SONY 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 SUNKAI 1044 SUNSTAR 1042 SUNTRONIC 1042 SUNWOOD 1050 SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 SYMPHONIC 1005 TAISHO 1044 TANDY 1001 TASHIKO 1003, 1042 TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 TEAC 1005, 1007 TECHNICS 1004, 1048 TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005 TELEAVIA 1043 TELEFUNKEN 1043 1050 1042, 1045, 1050 1044, 1048 1043, 1058 1043, 1047 1002, 1014 1045, 1050 1050 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014 TOWADA 1050 TOWIKA 1050 UHER 1045 UNITECH 1002, 1014 UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046 VECTOR RESEARCH 1000 VIDEO CONCEPTS 1000 VIDEON 1044, 1048 VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014 WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 WELTBLICK 1045 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007 YAMISHI 1050 YOKAN 1050 YOKO 1045, 1050 ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037 TENOSAL TENSAI TEVION THOMSON THORN TMK TOKAI TONSAI TOSHIBA DVD ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 2078 AIWA 2055, 2100 AKAI 2096 AKURA 2076 ALBA 2078, 2086 APEX 2027, 2049 AWA 2078 AXION 2078 BRAINWAVE 2096 BRANDT 2073, 2085 BROKSONIC 2060 BUSH 2075, 2078, 2112 CENTREX 2077 CLASSIC 2078 CLATRONIC 2075 COBY 2078 C-TECH 2074 CYBERHOME 2025, 2079, 2091 DAEWOO 2092, 2098 DANSAI 2096 DAYTEK 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 DENON 2030, 2102, 2103 DENVER 2075, 2076 DIAMOND 2074 DK DIGITAL 2094 DUAL 2078 D-VISION 2096 DVX 2074 ELTA 2096 EUROLINE 2096 FUNAI 2052, 2058 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 2074 vi APPENDIX 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 GELOSO 1050 GENERAL TECHNIC 1044, 1048 GO VIDEO 1014 GOLDHAND 1050 GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 GRADIENTE 1005 GRAETZ 1043, 1047 GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049 GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050 GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062 HANSEATIC 1045, 1046 HARLEY DAVIDSON 1005 HARMAN/KARDON 1000 HARWOOD 1006 HCM 1050 HEADQUARTER 1001 HINARI 1044, 1050 HISAWA 1044 HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 1010 HYPSON 1044, 1050 IMPERIAL 1042 INNO HIT 1046, 1050 INNOVATION 1044, 1048 INSTANT REPLAY 1004 INTERBUY 1045 INTERFUNK 1046, 1047 INTERVISION 1042 IRRADIO 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 JENSEN 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 KAISUI 1050 KARCHER 1046 KENDO 1044 KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 KODAK 1003, 1004 KORPEL 1050 LEYCO 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 LIFETEC 1044, 1048 LLOYD'S 1005 LOEWE 1048 LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046 LOGIK 1006, 1050 LUXOR 1047 LXI 1003 M ELECTRONIC 1042 MAGNASONIC 1047 MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033 MAGNIN 1003, 1014 MANESTH 1050 GLOBAL SPHERE 2074 GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078 GRUNDIG 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 HAAZ 2074 HE 2078 HITACHI 2032, 2072 HOME ELECTRONICS 2078 INNOVATION 2072 IRRADIO 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 KENWOOD 2030, 2097 KINGAVON 2075 KODA 2075 LAWSON 2074 LENCO 2075 LG 2084, 2087 LIFETEC 2072 LIMIT 2074 LOGICLAB 2074 LUXOR 2077 MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075 MAGNUM 2072 MBO 2078 MEDION 2072 MICROMAXX 2072 MICROMEDIA 2073 MICROSTAR 2072 MITSUBISHI 2035 MIZUDA 2075 MUSTEK 2078 NAIKO 2077 ONKYO 2073, 2135 ORAVA 2075 P&B 2075 PACIFIC 2074 PANASONIC 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 PIONEER 2036, 2082 PROLINE 2077 PROVISION 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 RED STAR 2076 REOC 2074 ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086 ROWA 2077 SABA 2085 SABAKI 2074 SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 SANSUI 2074 SANYO 2095 SCANMAGIC 2078 SCIENTIFIC LABS 2074 SCOTT 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 SILVA 2076 SINGER 2074 SKYMASTER 2074, 2078 SKYWORTH 2076 SM ELECTRONIC 2074, 2078 SONY 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 SOUNDMASTER 2074 SOUNDMAX 2074 STANDARD 2074 STAR CLUSTER 2074 STARMEDIA 2075 SUPERVISION 2074, 2078 SYLVANIA 2052, 2058 SYNN 2074 TCM 2072 TEAC 2074 TEC 2076 TECHNICS 2030 TECHNIKA 2096 TECHNOSONIC 2096 TEVION 2072, 2074 THOMSON 2085, 2109 TOKAI 2076 TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 UNITED 2078 VOXSON 2078 WHARFEDALE 2074 XLOGIC 2074 YAKUMO 2077 YAMADA 2077 YAMAHA 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 YUKAI 2078 ZENITH 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD-DVR PANASONIC PIONEER SAMSUNG 2067 2114 2115 TOSHIBA PANASONIC 2068 DVD/LD COMBO PIONEER 2036 DVD RECORDER APEX JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TOSHIBA YAMAHA YUKAI 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 DVR ABS 2132 ALIENWARE 2132 CYBERPOWER 2132 DELL 2132 DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH NETWORK 2126, 2127 DISHPRO 2126 ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127 EXPRESSVU 2126 GATEWAY 2132 GOI 2126 HEWLETT PACKARD 2132 HITACHI 2008 HOWARD COMPUTERS 2132 HTS 2126 HUGHES 2123, 2128 HUMAX 2123 HUSH 2132 IBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 LINKSYS 2132 MEDIA CENTER PC 2132 MICROSOFT 2132 MIND 2132 NIVEUS MEDIA 2132 NORTHGATE 2132 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014 PROSCAN 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120 SHARP 2009, 2010 SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120 SONY 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 STACK 9 2132 SYSTEMAX 2132 TAGAR SYSTEMS 2132 TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132 TOUCH 2132 ULTIMATETV 2133 VIEWSONIC 2132 VOODOO 2132 YAMAHA 2011 ZT GROUP 2132 LD PLAYER YAMAHA 2002 CD PLAYER YAMAHA 5000, 5013 CD RECORDER YAMAHA 5001 MD YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK YAMAHA 5005, 5006 TUNER YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014 All rights reserved. Printed in China WK65630 1 SILENT CINEMA PHONES STANDBY /ON 9 SPEAKERS A/B/OFF ■ Front panel/Face avant 3 0 TONE CONTROL EDIT PRESET/TUNING 2 l FM/AM A h 1 A/B/C/D/E PROGRAM 4 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. 00_Sheet_RHTR-6050_UC.book Page 1 Saturday, May 19, 2007 2:35 PM B EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 l 3 PRESET/TUNING C DIRECT STEREO SCENE 5 l 4 h D INPUT h MEMORY 7 E AUDIO SELECT F TUNING AUTO/MAN'L OPTIMIZER MIC 6 VIDEO L AUDIO VIDEO AUX R VOLUME USB 8 HTR-6050 UC 00_Sheet_RHTR-6050_UC.book Page i Saturday, May 19, 2007 2:35 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande Y A B POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR M N O P TV CH C V-AUX USB AMP TV INPUT 1 2 TV VOL TV MUTE D E F SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE G 3 4 VOLUME MENU R ENTER H S DISPLAY RETURN Q REC I FREQ/TEXT J K L EON l PROG h 1 2 MODE – PTY SEEK – START ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 8 T U ENT V 4 DIRECT ST. SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 W X Printed in China WK65650-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-6050 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-6050 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-6050 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-6050 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha HTR-6050 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6050 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha HTR-6050 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-6050 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-6050 Omistajan opas
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-6050 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-6050 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6050 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha HTR-6050 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-6050 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha HTR-6025 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX V661 - AV Receiver Handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V863 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V563 Handleiding